Anda di halaman 1dari 278

Title page

1350 OMS | 9.6


1350 OMS Service Assurance Guide
8DG42227FAAA
Issue 3 | June 2014
Legal notice

Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2014 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.

Notice

Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to
change.

Warranty

Alcatel-Lucent provides a limited warranty for this product. For more information, consult your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team.

Ordering information

The ordering number for this document is 8DG42227FAAA. To order 1350 OMS information products, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support
team.

Technical support

For technical support, contact your local customer support team. You can reach them via the Web at the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Support web site
(http://www. alcatel-lucent.com/support) or the customer support telephone number listed at the Alcatel-Lucent Contact Us web site (http://www.alcatel-
lucent.com/contact).

Information product support

For questions or concerns about this or any other Alcatel-Lucent information product, please contact us at one of the following numbers: (888) 727-3615 (for
the continental United States), +1 (630) 713-5000 (for all countries).
Contents

About this document


Purpose .......................................................................................................................................................................................... xiii
xiii

What's new ................................................................................................................................................................................... xiii


xiii

Safety information ..................................................................................................................................................................... xiii


xiii

Intended audience ...................................................................................................................................................................... xiii


xiii

Conceptual and task content ................................................................................................................................................... xiv


xiv

Format of task content .............................................................................................................................................................. xiv


xiv

Typographical conventions used for content ..................................................................................................................... xv

Marking conventions used for content ................................................................................................................................ xv

Technical content ......................................................................................................................................................................... xv


xv

Treatment of terms ..................................................................................................................................................................... xvi


xvi

Documents that support and are required for the complete understanding of the 1350 SA ........................... xvi

Document formats .................................................................................................................................................................... xvii


xvii

On-line help ................................................................................................................................................................................ xvii


xvii

Ordering information ............................................................................................................................................................... xvii


xvii

How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xvii


xvii

Part I: Fault Management

1 CFM process variables

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1


1-1

CFM process variables setting

CFM process Environment Variables ................................................................................................................................ 1-2


1-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS iii
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Fault Management Concepts

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1


2-1

FM Component Overview ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-1


2-1

FM Architectural Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 2-5


2-5

Alarm Management .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-7


2-7

Current Fault GUI .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-13


2-13

Historical Fault GUI .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-24


2-24

Secondary Fault Windows .................................................................................................................................................. 2-29


2-29

Administration Fault Windows ......................................................................................................................................... 2-37


2-37

3 Fault Management Tasks

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1


3-1

Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms ..................................................................................... 3-3
3-3

Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Historical Alarms ................................................................................. 3-4
3-4

Navigate to FM from Another Application ..................................................................................................................... 3-5


3-5

Navigate from FM from Another Application ................................................................................................................ 3-6


3-6

Access Specific Alarm Sublists ........................................................................................................................................... 3-7


3-7

Freeze Data on an Alarm List ............................................................................................................................................... 3-8


3-8

View Inactive Sublists ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-9


3-9

Paginate Alarm Sublists ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-10


3-10

Select Incoming Alarms Automatically .......................................................................................................................... 3-11


3-11

Automatically Raise an AS Window ............................................................................................................................... 3-12


3-12

View Text Multi-Lines .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-13


3-13

Show/Hide Alarm List Areas ............................................................................................................................................. 3-14


3-14

Create an Alarm Sublist ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-16


3-16

Modify an Alarm Sublist ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-18


3-18

Activate Alarm Sublist Counters ...................................................................................................................................... 3-26


3-26

Deactivate Alarm Sublist Counters .................................................................................................................................. 3-27


3-27

Delete Alarm Sublists ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-28


3-28

View More Information About an Alarm ....................................................................................................................... 3-29


3-29
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reserve Alarms ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-31
3-31

Reserve and Assign Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ 3-32


3-32

Unreserve Alarms ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-34


3-34

Trouble Ticket Alarms .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-35


3-35

Acknowledge Alarms ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-36


3-36

Unacknowledge Alarms ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-37


3-37

Manually Purge an Alarm .................................................................................................................................................... 3-38


3-38

Manually Clear an Alarm .................................................................................................................................................... 3-39


3-39

Export Output of an Alarm ................................................................................................................................................. 3-41


3-41

Print Output of an Alarm ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-43


3-43

Administer Alarm Sources .................................................................................................................................................. 3-45


3-45

Synchronize Alarm Sources ............................................................................................................................................... 3-62


3-62

Manage Alarm Debouncing ................................................................................................................................................ 3-63


3-63

Part II: Performance Monitoring

4 CPM Process Variables

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1


4-1

CPM process variables setting

CPM process Environment Variables ................................................................................................................................ 4-2


4-2

5 Performance Monitoring Concepts

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1


5-1

PM Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2


5-2

PM Architectural Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 5-4


5-4

PM Report Analysis ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-14


5-14

Selective PM ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-14


5-14

Search Functions ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15


5-15

Action Functions ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-16


5-16

TP Values ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-16


5-16

NML Measure Management ............................................................................................................................................... 5-17


5-17

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS v
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NML Transport Management ............................................................................................................................................. 5-17
5-17

NML TP Management .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-18


5-18

NML TCA Management ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-18


5-18

NML Audit Management ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-18


5-18

NML Report Profile Management ................................................................................................................................... 5-19


5-19

Report Generation Concepts .............................................................................................................................................. 5-19


5-19

Tabular Reports ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-20


5-20

Line Chart Reports ................................................................................................................................................................. 5-21


5-21

Bar Chart Reports ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-22


5-22

Database Administration through the Performance Monitoring Component ................................................... 5-23


5-23

6 Performance Monitoring Tasks

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1


6-1

PM Lists

Access the 1350 OMS PM Component ............................................................................................................................ 6-4


6-4

NML Measures List ................................................................................................................................................................ 6-5


6-5

List NML Measures ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-6


6-6

Select EML Domains ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-7


6-7

List EML NEs ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-8


6-8

List EML TPs ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-9


6-9

Select NML Domains ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-11


6-11

List NML Measures ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-12


6-12

List NML Transports ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-13


6-13

List NML Unassociated Transports ................................................................................................................................. 6-14


6-14

List NML TPs .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-15


6-15

List NML TCAs ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16


6-16

List NML NEs ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-17


6-17

View the Properties of a Selected List Item .................................................................................................................. 6-18


6-18

Search EML NEs by Name ................................................................................................................................................. 6-19


6-19

Search EML TPs by Name and Type .............................................................................................................................. 6-21


6-21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Search EML TPs by Value .................................................................................................................................................. 6-23
6-23

PM Report Profiles and Reports

NML Report Profiles List .................................................................................................................................................... 6-25


6-25

List NML Report Profiles .................................................................................................................................................... 6-26


6-26

Create Report Profiles .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-27


6-27

Select Report Profiles .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-30


6-30

Modify Report Profiles ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-32


6-32

Delete Report Profiles ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-35


6-35

Correlate Report Profiles with Measures ..................................................................................................................... 6-37


6-37

Uncorrelate the Default Report Profiles with Measures ......................................................................................... 6-40


6-40

Set the Time for a Generated Report ............................................................................................................................... 6-43


6-43

Generate Tabular, Line Chart, or Bar Chart Reports ................................................................................................. 6-45


6-45

Set Report Criteria ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-47


6-47

Scheduled CSV Report file generation

Description ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-48


6-48

Generate Scheduled CSV Report Files ........................................................................................................................... 6-50


6-50

PM Measures

Create Measures ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-51


6-51

Modify Measures .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-53


6-53

Delete Measures ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-54


6-54

Start Measures ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-55


6-55

Stop Measures ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-57


6-57

Creating SDH Measure ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-59


6-59

Consist Measures .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-63


6-63

Export NML Measures to a CSV File ............................................................................................................................. 6-64


6-64

DBA Archive Rules

View/Change DBA Archive Rules ................................................................................................................................... 6-67


6-67

Archive/Purge/Retrieve/Delete DBA Archive Sessions ........................................................................................... 6-69


6-69

Automatically Archive or Purge Archive Sessions .................................................................................................... 6-71


6-71
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS vii
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs

Start TPs ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-72


6-72

Stop TPs ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-74


6-74

Delete All Disactive TPs ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-76


6-76

Unassociate Transport from Measures ........................................................................................................................... 6-78


6-78

Export EML and NML TPs to a CSV File .................................................................................................................... 6-80


6-80

Start Transports ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-82


6-82

Stop Transports ........................................................................................................................................................................ 6-83


6-83

Create TCAs ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-84


6-84

Delete TCAs ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-86


6-86

Generate an Audit for an NE .............................................................................................................................................. 6-88


6-88

Generate an Audit for a TP ................................................................................................................................................. 6-89


6-89

A Probable Cause Mappings

Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1


A-1

CFM OTO Alarm Probable Causes ................................................................................................................................... A-1


A-1

CFM OTO Default ASAPs ................................................................................................................................................... A-3


A-3

SDH OTO Alarm Probable Causes ................................................................................................................................... A-4


A-4

B List of Abbreviations

List of Abbreviations .............................................................................................................................................................. B-1


B-1

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
List of tables

6-1 CSV Report Field Description ........................................................................................................................... 6-66

A-1 Probable Alarm Causes for CFM Communication OTOs ......................................................................... A-1

A-2 Probable Alarm Causes for CFM Quality of Service OTOs ..................................................................... A-2

A-3 Probable Alarm Causes for CFM Processing Error OTOs ........................................................................ A-2

A-4 CFM OTO ASAP Default Severity and Operational States ...................................................................... A-3

A-5 Probable Alarm Causes for SDH Communication OTOs .......................................................................... A-4

A-6 Probable Alarm Causes for SDH Quality of Service OTOs ..................................................................... A-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS ix
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
List of tables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
List of figures

1-1 Alarm handling by polling ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5

1-2 Alarm handling via CI channel ............................................................................................................................. 1-6

2-1 Fault Management GUI Architecture ................................................................................................................. 2-4

2-2 Current Fault GUI Primary Window ................................................................................................................ 2-13

2-3 Current Fault GUI Toolbar Icons ...................................................................................................................... 2-23

2-4 Historical Fault GUI Toolbar .............................................................................................................................. 2-28

5-1 CPM GUI Server Architecture .............................................................................................................................. 5-5

5-2 CPM NML Subsystem Architecture ................................................................................................................... 5-7

5-3 CPM EML Subsystem Architecture .................................................................................................................... 5-8

5-4 Start PM Sequence Flowchart ............................................................................................................................ 5-11

5-5 CPM EML Data Storage Flowchart ................................................................................................................. 5-12

5-6 CPM Report Generation Sequence Flowchart ............................................................................................. 5-13

6-1 CSV Report File Directory List ......................................................................................................................... 6-48

6-2 Search > PM>PM Domains on NML .............................................................................................................. 6-59

6-3 Actions >Create Measure. .................................................................................................................................... 6-60

6-4 Measure List .............................................................................................................................................................. 6-62


6-62

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS xi
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
About this document
About this document

Purpose
This preface provides an overview of this information product (IP), which is the 1350
OMS Service Assurance Guide.
The purpose of the 1350 OMS Service Assurance Guide is to explain to users the Fault
Management and Performance Monitoring features.

What's new
This document has been reissued on September 2012 to advice a particular configuration
for PM collecting on 1830PSS Network Elements on the1350 OMS 9.6.
This document has been reissued on January 2014 to describe how to generate scheduled
CSV Report file on the1350 OMS 9.6.

Safety information
This document does not contain any safety information (cautions or warnings) because
the 1350 OMS is a software product.
Important! When working with any hardware that is associated with any piece of
software, always refer to the safety information that the hardware manufacturer provides
for that particular piece of hardware. For example, when working with an HP® server,
refer to safety information that is provided in the HP® documentation for that server.
When working with any Alcatel-Lucent network element, refer to safety information that
is provided in the Alcatel-Lucent documentation for that particular NE.

Intended audience
The 1350 OMS Service Assurance Guide is written primarily for operations personnel
who use the 1350 OMS for network administration and provisioning. This document can
be used by anyone who needs specific administration or provisioning information about
the features, applications, and operations of the Element Management Level (EML) of the
1350 OMS. These people are you, its users.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS xiii
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conceptual and task content
In the broadest sense, this document contains the following types of content:
• Conceptual content, which is background information, is given so users can better
understand the tasks that must be performed. The presentation of conceptual
information varies according to the topic being explained—sections, subsections,
tables, figures, and screen captures can be commonly found.
• Task content, which includes step-by-step instructions, is provided so users can
administer, provision, and maintain the system. The task information is typically
presented as series of tasks that follows the conceptual information.
The conceptual information complements and enhances the step-by-step instructions that
are found in each task. To optimize the use of the conceptual and task content, users
should consider the following:
• The conceptual information should be used to broaden your general knowledge of the
network management system. It is best if you read all conceptual information and
have a good understanding of the concepts being presented before undertaking the
step-by-step instructions given in any task.
• The conceptual and task portions of the document have extensive hyperlinks. Use
these links to toggle between the two types of information presented so you can
access all pertinent information related to particular concepts and tasks.
• The task information is based on a user needs analysis that has been performed for
each management system user job; therefore, use the task information to get the job at
hand done quickly and with minimal system impact.

Format of task content


Each task consists of sections that are called When to use, Related information, Before
you begin, and Task. The intent of these sections is self-explanatory—they explain when
you should use the task, any related information that you would need to know while doing
the task, and what you need to consider or do before you start the task.
When a task does not have any related information that must be considered before it is
started, the Related information section for that task states the following:
This task does not have any related information.
When a task does not have any conditions that must be considered before it is started, the
Before you begin section for that task states the following:
This task does not have any preconditions.
Each Task section consists of steps. The completion of all steps, which are sequentially
numbered, is required for the entire task to be completed successfully. In some instances,
a step might be prefaced with the wording Optional, which indicates that the step can be
skipped and the task can still be completed successfully. A task is considered to be
completed when all of its steps are completed and when the wording End of Steps
appears.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Many times, the management system affords users with multiple ways to accomplish the
same task. In these instances, this type of task gives the user several Methods of how to
accomplish the same set of steps successfully.

Typographical conventions used for content


This document uses the following typographical conventions:
• User input or path navigation on the administration and application GUIs is
identified with this type.
• User input in the UNIX® environment is identified with this
type.
• System output in the UNIX® environment is identified with
this type..
• GUI fields/parameters and their options are identified with this type.
• Document titles or words that are being defined or emphasized are identified with this
type.

Marking conventions used for content


The following convention is used to indicate a path, which is a flow of buttons and/or
menu items that you must navigated through to arrive at a destination on the GUI:
Actions > EML > Create NE
This same convention is also used to show a path through a series of menu items, for
example:
Click the filtering tool and select Layer > EML.
All mouse selections are presumed to be left clicks. Right click mouse selections are
indicated as the following:
Right click the highlighted item and follow the path: Search > Show Equipment.
Or, if brevity is needed, the same path could be documented as:
RClick item > Search > Show Equipment.
Occasionally, a set of 1350 OMS features is not supported for all NEs or for all operating
components and/or environments. This set of features is clearly marked to show these
exceptions.

Technical content
In general, the technical content in this document is augmented by technical content that
is provided in other documents in this documentation set and/or in the document set of the
particular network element (NE ) or piece of hardware in the network configuration. It is
the user's responsibility to read all pertinent material in all documentation sets in order to
understand a particular concept or procedure and/or to implement the procedure in his or
her working environment.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS xv
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This document contains information on the complete line of NEs that the 1350 OMS
supports. Each release of the 1350 OMS and its applications supports certain NEs within
the Alcatel-Lucent family of optical NEs. Mention of NEs or specific NE features in the
text of this document, or any document in the 1350 OMS documentation set, that are not
supported in this particular product release can apply to prior or future product releases.
Such material may not be currently visible or operable on the GUI and/or the server and
has been added only as a convenience for our customers. This material is subject to
change. For a list of NEs that are supported in the 1350 OMS 9.6, contact your
Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team.
This document, or any document in the 1350 OMS documentation set, may contain
information that is related to features, service packs (SPs), maintenance releases, or other
updates that our product and its applications supported in prior releases or is to support in
the near future. This material may not be visible or operable on the supported servers
and/or GUI, and has been added only as a convenience for our customers. This material is
subject to change. For a list of all supported features for a particular release, contact your
Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team.

Treatment of terms
A term that is presented in the text of this document, along with any used abbreviation for
the term, is typically defined where the term is initially introduced.
Many of the more generic terms that are defined in this document, along with the terms
that are defined in other documents in this documentation set, are also defined in the
Glossary, which is part of the 1350 OMS Getting Started Guide. We encourage our users
to rely on the Glossary for a comprehensive set of terms and any abbreviations of the
terms.

Documents that support and are required for the complete understanding of the 1350 SA
The following documents support the Alcatel-Lucent 1350 SA 9.6 and are required to
understand its content completely:
• The 1350 OMS Getting Started Guide (8DG42227AAAA) explains the look-and-feel
of the user and administration GUIs to new users. This document contains a complete
explanation of the 1350 OMS information product set and a glossary of terms that is
applicable to the entire documentation set.
• The 1350 OMS Administration Guide (8DG42227LAAA) explains how to administer
and maintain the element management layer, network management layer, and service
management layer of the 1350 OMS.
This document consists of the following volumes:
– The 1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 1: Common Tools and Processes
(8DG42227LAAA-Vol1) explains how to administer and maintain the common
tools and processes that are associated with the 1350 OMS.
– The 1350 OMS Administration Guide, Vol 2: Common GUI Functions
(8DG42227LAAA-Vol2) explains how to administer and maintain the common
administration GUIs that are associated with the 1350 OMS.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In addition, the 1350 OMS 9.6 also supports installation and migration activities with
related documentation. Contact your Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team
for additional details.

Document formats
This document is available for use in HTML format and PDF.
The on-line HTML version of the document has a search capability, a table of contents in
the front matter of the document, a partial table of contents in each chapter, and an index.
The PDF version can be viewed on-line; or it, or portions of it, can be printed locally at
the user's discretion.

On-line help
The 1350 OMS help systems are designed to consider the task that the user is performing
and to help the user complete the task.
Contact sensitive help, which defines many GUI fields, is available; and other types of
help can be accessed from the GUI menu.

Ordering information
The ordering number for this particular document is 8DG42227FAAA. Contact your local
Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team for details.
In addition, to order the 1350 OMS and/or any of its applications, add-on features or
upgrades, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support team.

How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS xvii
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Part I: Fault Management

Overview
Purpose
This part describes the Fault Management application inside the 1350 OMS product.

Contents

Chapter 1, CFM process variables 1-1


Chapter 2, Fault Management Concepts 2-1
Chapter 3, Fault Management Tasks 3-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS I-1
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I-2 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
1 CFM process variables
1

Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the CFM variables and the setting for the correct process
management.

Contents

CFM process variables setting 1-2


CFM process Environment Variables 1-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 1-1
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
CFM process variables Overview
CFM process variables setting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CFM process variables setting

CFM process Environment Variables


General on CFM
CFM process acts as alarm correlator between 1350OMS components.

General on CFM variables


CFM process Environment Variables are contained in file
/usr/Systems/SDH_<nms_instance>/CFM/.cfmenv
To render effective the changes to the variables it is required the CFM restart.
The description of the parameters is contained in the following.

ENABLE_ALR_HISTORY
VALUES
• String : only_in_service
The Historical alarm mng. is enabled only for objects with service state =in_service.
• String : ON
The Historical alarm mng. is enabled for all objects.
• Default string: OFF
The Historical alarm mng. is disabled.

SIZE_ALR_HISTORY
DEFINITION
This parameter defines the lenght of the queue of elementary alarms, contained in the
historical, relevant to a single alarm of a superordinate object (e.g. a path).
This parameter is significant only if the previous ... is not set to OFF.
VALUES
• Min Value: 1
• Max Value: 20
• Default Value: 10

CFM_Debouncing
DEFINITION
This variable is always significant. CFM removes all alarms blinking in the queue.
If an alarm is blinking for a time period [lE ] Nldelta_time ⇒the alarm is removed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
CFM process variables CFM process Environment Variables
CFM process variables setting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VALUES
• String : OFF
• String : ON
• Default Value: OFF

N_Rows_for_Delete
DEFINITION
This variable is used to define how many alarm rows can be deleted in one shot.
VALUES
• Min Value: 1
• Max Value: 5000
• Default Value: 250

Split_PROPOP
DEFINITION
This variable is used to define how many user command rows can be deleted in one shot.
It refers to user commands which may cause alarm propagation.
VALUES
• Min Value: 10
• Max Value: 300
• Default Value: 30

WAIT_START_AGENT
DEFINITION
This variable defines the time (by ten seconds) to wait to start the alarm mng. agents after
the execution of CFM_Truncate script.
The script CFM_Truncate first kills all Alarm mng. agents, then clears all alarms.
VALUES
• Min Value: 1
• Max Value: n
• Default Value: 30

ALARM_DEFRAG
DEFINITION
This variable defines the threshold ( no. of elementary alarms to process), which, if
exceeded, causes the alarm defragmentation to start only upon CFM agent restart.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 1-3
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
CFM process variables CFM process Environment Variables
CFM process variables setting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The alarm defragmentation removes the repeated alarms. Only the first alarm remains (if
still active) or the last alarm remains (if already cleared)
VALUES
• Min Value: 100
• Max Value: 800
• Default Value: 200

CFM_MEDIATOR
DEFINITION
If the value = ON, path and trail alarms are converted to the format suitable to be sent to
WDM_GUI via LCSI (Layered Client Server Infrastructure) interface.
VALUES
• String: ON
• String: OFF
• Default Value: ON

NXNL_CONSISTALARM
DEFINITION
This parameter defines if consistency alarms (e.g. subsequent to an audit operation)
should be propagated or not.
VALUES
• String: ON
• String: OFF
• Default Value: OFF

POLLING_ALR_TIME_UNIT
DEFINITION
It is the time interval between subsequent alarm polling actions on the elementary alarms
stored in DB. Polling is disabled if the variable is not defined.
VALUES
• Min Value: 2(secs)
• Max Value: 14400
• Default Value: not defined (Polling disabled)
OPERATION
1. NE adapter sends the alarm
2. HFM ( Hosting Fault Mng.) stores the alarm in DB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-4 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
CFM process variables CFM process Environment Variables
CFM process variables setting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. The alarm is picked by CFM
4. CFM processes the alarm.
5. CFM sends the alarm to AS
6. CFM marks the alarm on DB as processed in case of rise or deletes it in case of clear.

Figure 1-1 Alarm handling by polling

OPERATION WITH SDH COMPONENT


1. The alarm (rise) coming from emlim is sent to FepAlr
2. FepAlr stores the alarm in DB and sends it to CFM via dedicated channel.
3. CFM processes the alarm.
4. CFM marks the alarm on DB as processed
Note: The operation is the same for alarm clear.
5. In addition, a polling operation on DB is executed by CFM for not processed alarms.
Obviously, during polling activity, the channel from FepAlr to CFM is OFF.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 1-5
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
CFM process variables CFM process Environment Variables
CFM process variables setting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 1-2 Alarm handling via CI channel

WAIT_RE_ALIGNMENT
DEFINITION
Following a CFM restart, the realignment of the alarms is executed after the
WAIT_RE_ALIGNMENT time.
VALUES
• Min Value: 1 (sec)
• Max Value: 14400 (secs)
• Default Value: NONE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-6 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
2 2ault Management
F
Concepts

Overview
Purpose
Fault Management (FM) concepts and functionalities discussed in this chapter pertain to
common Fault Management features across the 1350 OMS. Fault Management concepts
that are application-specific are discussed in the applicable application documents.
For Converged Fault Management (CFM) tasks, see Chapter 3, “Fault Management
Tasks”.

Contents

FM Component Overview 2-1


FM Architectural Overview 2-5
Alarm Management 2-7
Current Fault GUI 2-13
Historical Fault GUI 2-24
Secondary Fault Windows 2-29
Administration Fault Windows 2-37

FM Component Overview
Fault Management Description
The 1350 OMS alarm management functionality is provided by the Fault Management
(FM) application. This management functionality provides an efficient mechanism to
control, supervise, and manage equipment anomalies that may occur in a
telecommunications network. It covers provisioning of information concerning Fault
Management, and Alarm Management such as displaying alarm lists and acknowledging
alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-1
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts FM Component Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault Management Functionalities
The FM component is dedicated to receive, store, display and manage alarms (current
alarms) raised by different sources in real time, facilitating the overall Fault Management
of the network, and improving the reaction time of the network users in case of anomalies
in the network. It also provides the possibility to archive and retrieve the alarms, referred
to as historical alarms, allowing post-analysis of anomalies in the network.
Current and historical alarms can be displayed in lists. By mouse clicking, the user can
get detailed information, or can perform actions on the alarm when the alarm is raised.
For current alarms a synthesis of alarm information can be displayed in submaps. This
alarm information is displayed for each NE present within the submap.

Fault Management Features


A comprehensive set of Fault Management features allows users to monitor and track
alarms and transient condition events in the network. The FM component receives and
processes the alarms on the network in real time, which enables a network user to locate
and repair faults in the network. The FM GUI displays alarms and network events as
correlated by the various 1350 OMS components.
FM functionality supports navigation from network correlated alarms in the FM system
into the raising network level component and assesses the elementary or server layer
network layer alarms that have been correlated. FM functionality also supports the alarm
acknowledgement process.
When a network layer alarm is cleared to a historical alarm, the alarm information is
stored with the last correlated elementary or server layer alarm whose clearing caused the
correlated alarm to be cleared.
The following features can be used to monitor and track alarms and events that occur in
the network:
• Alarm synchronization
• Alarm and event logging
• Notification of alarms and events
• Alarm List
Additional features include the following:
• Single alarm management for all components
• Consolidated list of all alarms from underlying components, which includes
elementary and correlated alarms for all managed NEs
• Real-time summary of all current alarms
• List of historical alarms
• Filtered and sorted lists, including complex filters and sorting criteria
• Default alarm sublists available based on severity and component

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-2 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts FM Component Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• User-defined alarm sublist criteria
• Centralized alarm acknowledgement enabling an alarm to be acknowledged once
from the central alarm list

An Iterative Approach for Alarm Description


Fault Management offers a window divided in three panels for viewing the alarms:
• The Counter Summary panel : Main window used to display statistics on alarms. It
shows alarm counters, according to severity levels or statuses of the alarms.
• The Alarm Sublist panel : Basic working window. It keeps real-time counter totals for
each alarm type of severity level.
• The Sublist Display panel : Basic working panel. It regroups alarms according to
filtering criteria defined by the user, and allows the user to work on a limited subset of
alarms.

Alarm Information
Alarms are messages emitted by network resources that have detected problems or
failures in the network. Information contained in the alarm belongs to two classes:
• Resource identification
• Type identification
Resource Identification
Resource identification identifies the resource which has raised the alarm. The resource
type and the resource name are reported as identifiers. The resource name is unique in
order to avoid identification ambiguities.
Type Identification
Type identification identifies the alarm problem type. The type of problem contains three
basic elements of information :
• Problem type - Refer to “Problem Types” (p. 2-10) for additional information.
• Probable cause - Refer to “Probable Causes” (p. 2-10) for additional information.
• Severity level - Refer to “Severity Levels” (p. 2-9) for additional information.

Architecture of Fault Management GUIs


Architecture of Fault Management
Fault Management is made up of two main GUI applications:
• The Current GUI is dedicated to the real-time treatment of current alarms, that is,
alarms which have just been raised by a resource.
• The Historical GUI is dedicated to the management of the archived alarms.
The following diagram presents the architecture of Fault Management GUIs:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-3
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts FM Component Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-1 Fault Management GUI Architecture

Workflow Navigation
Workflow Navigation
The following provides a typical navigation flow of the Fault Management Current and
Historical GUIs:
• Initiation begins from a web browser.
• Incoming navigation to the FM GUI goes to either the Current GUI primary window
or to the Historical GUI primary window, depending on the type of transaction.
• Navigation occurs internally within the Current GUI.
• Navigation occurs internally within the Historical GUI.
• Navigation occurs between the Current GUI and the Historical GUI as appropriate.
• Output from both the Current GUI and the Historical GUI uses one of the following
methods, each of which have further sublevels from which to choose options:
– Print
– Export

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts FM Component Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Navigation from Alarm Lists for Correlated Alarms
Navigation from Alarm Lists
The following navigation capabilities are supported from FM Alarm Lists to 1350 OMS
Alarm Lists:
• From an Elementary Alarm in FM to the Equipment view of the failed resource in the
EML
• From a Correlated Connection Alarm in FM to the connection in the NM component
Within 1350 OMS, navigation capabilities are supported from an alarmed connection to
one of the following:
• The list of correlated alarms, and for each of the list of elementary alarms and alarmed
objects
• The list of the impacted services carried by the connection
• The list of alarmed connections on the server layers
• The list of alarmed Termination Points (TPs) on the server layers

FM Architectural Overview
FM Architectural Overview
CFM (Correlation Fault Management) is an alarm correlation component that impacts
transport objects by new Correlated Alarms starting from an Elementary Alarm received
from the network.
The CFM component does not have an internal database for elementary alarms and
correlated alarms. Rather, these alarms are stored only in the NM applications.

Supported External Products


CFM supports the following external product:
• AS - ALMAP Fault Manager

External Interfaces and Data


External Interfaces on the North side follow:
• Interface toward AS
• NBI Open Interfaces
• LCSI Interface toward Client NM applications

Internal Interfaces and Data


Internal Interfaces follow:
• A trigger interface with the related NM application to notify a user when a new
correlation is required. Information flow is from the NM application to CFM.
• An API mechanism that is in charge for operational state and alarm status upgrades.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-5
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts FM Architectural Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• A shared database view of interworking tables to permit the NM applications and
CFM to exchange alarm data. The NM applications control data synchronization
processes.
• APIs that implement a common inventory toward NM applications to obtain specific
information for correlation rules that are applicable.

Database Table Views Available


The set of database tables that are used by CFM and NM applications to exchange alarm
data include the following:
• EA (Elementary Alarm) Table - contains elementary alarms that the NM application
has received.
• Operation Table - contains the operation performed on the NM application that
requires an alarm correlation activity, such as:
– A Path is newly-commissioned.
– A TP inside the Path route has had a rule changed.
• CA (Correlated Alarm) Table - contains the correlated alarms that CFM produces.
• CA-EA Relational Table - relates the EA to the CA.

Correlation Rules
Correlation rules are the set of technologically-specific behaviors that provide
information to CFM as to what needs to be done for any occurring EA coming in from the
network. A correlation rule is the relationship among a TP type, TP correlation class, EA
NM probable cause, impacted transport object type, and CA probable cause. CFM uses
the appropriate rule to determine how an EA affects one or more transport objects.
The following is an example of an expected scenario for correlation rules:
• The NM application receives the alarm containing the NE alarmed object and the
native probable cause.
• The NM application maps the received NE object into the internal NM object model.
• The NM application stores the NM object model and the native probable cause into
the EA.
• CFM maps the native probable cause into an NM probable cause, and then applies the
appropriate correlation rule. CFM obtains the CA probable cause from the NM object
model plus the NM probable cause and impacted transport object.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-6 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Alarm Management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Management
Description
The Fault Management application provides alarm management capabilities in the
following functional areas:
• Global Alarm Management
• Current Alarm Management
• Elementary Alarm Management
• Historical Alarm Management
Each alarm notification received can cause both correlated and elementary alarm
notifications to be forwarded.
Note: Elementary alarm notifications are related to the alarm. Correlated alarm
notifications are related to the correlated connection.

Global Alarm Management


Global alarm management enables the user to supervise global network activity in order
to identify anomalies and solve them.

Current Alarm Management


Current alarm management enables the user to supervise network activity in order to
identify anomalies and solve them. The following sections describe actions taken on
current alarms.
When the alarm is displayed on the screen, the basic information is immediately available
to the user who can decide on the appropriate action to take.
See “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13) for more information.
Raise Alarm
When an alarm is raised by a faulty resource, it is received by Fault Management, which
stores it. The user can display the alarm as soon as it is signalled.
Display Alarm
When the alarm is displayed on the screen, the basic information is immediately available
to the user who can decide on the following actions:
• Get detailed information contained in the alarm.
• Reserve the alarm for further investigation. This action of reservation on the alarm
prevents other users from performing any action on the alarm.
• Request the creation of a Trouble Ticket (TT) to be handled by the external product
ARS (Action Remedy System). FM is interfaced to a Trouble Ticket management
third party product: ARS can request the creation of trouble tickets either on user
request (if the alarm is not reserved by another user), or automatically according to
filtering criteria. Once created, trouble ticket information is automatically updated
according to alarm processing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-7
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Alarm Management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Acknowledge the alarm, indicating that the cause of the alarm has been taken into
account, and that repair actions have been taken.
• Allow another user take the alarm into account.
During this whole period an alarm is considered to be current (alive), and its state is
automatically refreshed in real-time so that any user who displays this alarm knows the
actual state of the alarm.
Clear Alarm
The alarm is cleared by the emitting resource as soon as the problem is no longer present
at the resource level. As soon as the alarm is acknowledged by the user, it is no longer
considered a current alarm. The alarm is removed from the current alarm list and is
archived into the historical alarm list.
The problem to which the alarm is linked may not be solved immediately. In this case, the
alarm is repeated until the problem is solved. FM provides a repetition counter to each
received alarm. If the alarm is not cleared by the resource which raised it, then FM
enables the user to archive it manually.

Elementary Alarm Management


Certain Elementary Alarms can cause correlated alarms in EML and NM components as
follows:
• Transmission (X.733 Communication) Alarms on terminations and boundary TPs
• URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) Alarm
Elementary alarms can be manually set to enable alarm reporting on Intermediate Points,
that is, not Edge Points. Alarm reporting on Intermediate Points is disabled as the default.
This default can be modified using a predefined ASAP.

Historical Alarm Management


Once alarms are no longer considered as current, they are archived in the historical alarm
section of the FM application, where they can be reviewed. The historical part of Fault
Management is particularly useful to follow the activity of a network, its robustness, the
recurrence of problems, or to help the user to detect the network's critical points.
Historical Alarm information is structured as an alarm list.
A review of historical alarms is generally performed in four steps:
• Extract alarms - The required alarm list is extracted from the historical alarm
repository or from personal files. The user is requested to specify filtering criteria in
order to extract only the useful part of the alarms. These alarms are stored in a main
alarm list.
• Create sublists - Sublists are created from the main alarm list.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-8 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Alarm Management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• View the alarm sublists - The user can get basic information on the alarms including
the archive date and the reason. Once inserted in the HAL (Historical Alarm List), a
historical alarm cannot be modified. It contains the whole historical alarm information
shared by all FM users while the former current alarm is archived. In order to meet
the specific needs of the user, the Historical alarm information can be replicated
through multiple information sources, each having a specific purpose.
• View detailed alarm information - For a particular alarm.
See “Historical Fault GUI” (p. 2-24) for more information.

Status
Each connection has an Alarm Status defined. The Alarm Status represents the highest
severity of the active correlated alarms. The Alarm Status is displayed in all lists and on
graphical views, including network maps. The Alarm Status and associated Totals for
each type of Alarm Status are also visible on the Alarm List in the Sublist Counter area.
The following is a list of the types of Alarm Status categories:
• Critical
• Major
• Minor
• Warning
• Indeterminate
• Cleared
• Not Acknowledged

Severity Levels
Severity levels of a problem (perceived severity) are assigned when an alarm is raised.
Problems are ranked into five severity level categories:
• Critical - When it is no longer possible to provide the requested service.
• Major
• Minor
• Warning - No impact is reported on the quality of service offered.
• Indeterminate - If the severity level cannot be defined by the resource which raises
the alarm.
The Cleared severity level is used when the alarm is cleared by the resource which has
previously raised it.
The Alarm Severity associated to a correlated alarm is the severity defined for each
probable cause in the ASAP profile.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-9
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Alarm Management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Problem Types
Classification of a Problem Type is accomplished by means of the Probable Cause Alarm.
Possible problem types are:
• Quality of service
• Communications
• Processing error
• Equipment
• Environmental
Problem Type classifications in general include:
• Failure or degradation of the client signal
• Failure in transporting the signal
Refer to Appendix A, “Probable Cause Mappings” for Probable Cause and Problem Type
mappings.

Probable Causes
Probable Causes can be either standard probable cause values (ITU-T Recommendation
X.733), or locally-defined values.
The Probable Causes are sent with the correlated alarm.
Details included with specific Probable Causes include:
• End-to-end failure
– Failure in incoming signals for not terminated. This is useful for carrier-of-carrier
networking.
– Failure in outgoing signals for not terminated. This alarm can exist even if there is
no end-to-end failure when the transport service is protected in another network.
• Abnormal conditions in transport service
– Protection lost. This alarm can be used to trigger manual rerouting of failed
protection, or to perform accounting since it reduces the class of service.
– Rerouting in the ASON domain or unavailability of preplanned backup.
• Degradation of the transport service
– Signal degradation (BER)
– TCAs on PMs
• Inconsistency between the NMS view of the transport service and the NE view
– Inconsistency due to removal of a cross connection, or a change of configuration
on the NE, as compared to the NMS view
– Temporary misalignment between the NMS view and the NE view due to offline
configuration on one or more NEs in the connection route
Transport Failure means that the path is not working end-to-end. The managed domain
may not be interested in this alarm if the managed domain is not interested in the
end-to-end service. In this case, this alarm can be squelched using an appropriate ASAP.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-10 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Alarm Management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transport Incoming Failure means that a failure is entering the managed domain. This
alarm alone does not indicate if the end-to-end path works or not; it just indicates that a
wrong signal is entering. The managed domain may be able to recover from the failure if
the path is protected.
Transport Outgoing Failure means that the managed domain is providing at least one
flow that is in error to the outside. This alarm does not indicate if the end-to-end path
works or not. The end-to-end path may be protected outside of the managed domain in
such a way that the failure can be recovered.
Note: The operational state of the path itself is set to Disable only when the path is not
working end-to-end.
Refer to Appendix A, “Probable Cause Mappings” for Probable Cause and Problem Type
mappings.

General Alarm Activities


Management of alarms involves many types of general actions that can be performed on a
given alarm, such as:
• “Reserve Alarms” (p. 3-31)
• “Reserve and Assign Alarms” (p. 3-32)
• “Unreserve Alarms” (p. 3-34)
• “Trouble Ticket Alarms” (p. 3-35)
• “Acknowledge Alarms” (p. 3-36)
• “Unacknowledge Alarms” (p. 3-37)
• “Manually Purge an Alarm” (p. 3-38)
• “Manually Clear an Alarm” (p. 3-39)
• “Export Output of an Alarm” (p. 3-41)
• “Print Output of an Alarm” (p. 3-43)
• “Manage Alarm Debouncing” (p. 3-63)

Correlated Alarms on Transports


Correlated alarm events provide an indication that a transport is either in fault or in a
degraded state. 1350 OMS uses a URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) alarm on all
related ports of the equipment fault. This URU alarm is then used to correlate to all
network layer connections that are affected.

Alarm Indicators
Correlated alarms have indicators within them that identify specific information about the
alarm. Types of alarm indicators and explanations of them follow.
In Service/Not In Service
Correlated alarms carry indications as to whether the transport failure is in, or out, of
service. These indications are used to conditionally perform automatic acknowledgement
of the alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-11
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Alarm Management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Customer
Correlated alarms can carry indications of customer name if this field information is
supplied in the notification field. This customer name information is generally used in
post-processing functions.
Primary/Secondary Condition
Correlated alarms carry indications of whether the alarm is a primary (root) cause, or
whether the alarm is a secondary (non-root) cause.
Primary alarms require direct attention by the user. A correlated alarm is considered a
primary alarm if it is likely to have been the cause of the original problem in the network.
Examples are LOS or a URU alarm on a port caused by equipment.
Secondary alarms are generally meaningful for accounting purposes and/or for proactive
activities on the network, such as rerouting, or communication to VIP network customers.
A correlated alarm is considered a secondary alarm if it is the consequence of a primary
alarm elsewhere in the network. Such an example is for SSF.
Correlated Elementary Alarms
Correlated elementary alarms are included in a Fault Clear event so that they can be
stored in the historical alarm database.
Time Stamps
Time stamps on correlated alarms on raised alarms represent the time of the first-received
elementary alarm. Time stamps on correlated alarms on cleared alarms represent the time
of the last-cleared correlated alarm.

Alarm Debouncing
SNMP and Q3 NE Management provides an alarm filtering in the time scale of several
seconds to minutes (30 seconds to 4-5 minutes).
Each filter is identified by a Probable Cause and its Hold Period and configured by the
Alarm Debouncing GUI. The Alarm Debouncing GUI produces a filtering configuration
file and EML–IM is alerted as soon as the file is updated, so that the file is re-read.
EML–IM (Q3 and SNMP), by using the filtering configuration file, applies this filtering
mechanism to alarm notifications before sending alarms to Upper Managers.
• When a clear notification is received and it falls in a filter criteria (for example,
Probable Cause of clear notification has filter enabled), the clear notification is frozen
and not forwarded, and a timer is activated for the Hold Period.
• If a raise notification (with the same MOC, MOI, Probable Cause, Specific Problem,
Event Type of clear notification) is received before the Hold Period is exhausted, the
frozen clear notification is discarded, the timer is removed, and the raise notification
is forwarded.
• If no raise notification is received before the Hold Period is exhausted, on timer
expiration the frozen clear notification is forwarded.
The default configuration is no filter activated. The maximum number of active filters is
1000.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-12 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Current Fault GUI


Current Fault
Alarms that are dedicated to the real-time treatment of current alarms, for example,
alarms which have just been raised by a resource, are described in this section.

Current Fault GUI Primary Window


The Current Fault GUI Primary window is shown in the following figure.

Figure 2-2 Current Fault GUI Primary Window

In the Current Fault GUI window, most of the areas can be shown or hidden using menu
items or through the configuration file. If a particular menu or menu item is not
accessible, it appears in light gray font, and cannot be selected.
The following areas can be shown/hidden from:
• Menu item or configuration file (offline)
– Toolbar
– Counter Summary
– Sublist Content
– Alarms Pagination Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-13
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Sublist Counter
– Message Area
• Only configuration file (offline)
– Status Bar
– Logo
The following areas cannot be hidden and are mandatory:
• Title Bar
• Menu Bar

Current Fault Counter Summary Area


The Counter Summary area is composed of a scrollable read-only sublist table. Each row
represents a sublist with the following columns:
• First Column is a flag column that indicates change in a sublist since the last
consultation.
• Sublist Name is in bold when the sublist is activated. Inactive sublists have all of their
counters set to “x” and may be hidden from an item of the view menu. The Main
alarm and Default sublists are specifically used by the FM web platform, which
means that they cannot be deleted.
• Total is the total number of alarms for the sublist.
• Critical, Major, … represent the alarm distribution per severity level or status (Cleared
and Nack).
The counter summary table supports multiple selections.

Current Fault Counter Summary Modifications


The user can resize a column and change the order of the columns. The user can
hide/show columns from the contextual menu available on the header of the columns.
By configuration (XML configuration file), it is possible to define the default column
order and to define its resized policy between the following options:
• Fill - The sublist table takes all of the available size within the area.
• Autosize - The sublist table fits the columns size according to the contents.
• Fix size - The column size is fixed in the XML table definition file.
In all cases, if the table size is bigger than the available space, a scroll bar automatically
appears.

Current Fault Counter Summary User Preferences


The following customizable attributes are saved in user preferences:
• List and order of visible columns
• Column size

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-14 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Current Fault Counter Summary Contextual Menus
Right-clicking on a sublist opens a contextual menu with the following items. An item
can then be selected from the sublist.
• Modify
• New
• Open in new window
• Activate
• Deactivate
• Delete

FM Default Alarm Sublists


The 1350 OMS Default Alarm sublists are shared between all users. Owner of these
sublists is the alcatel predefined user. These shared default sublists will be distributed
to all users only when changed by the user alcatel.
In case 1350 OMS changes the definition of the default shared sublists, at login as
alcatel user, a warning message is displayed:
Detected Obsolete Alarm Sublist configuration for <EML | SDH | WDM | PKT | Global -
Current | Historical | Event Alarm List>. New default Sublist configuration is available.
It is recommended to update the Alarm Sublist Configuration.
To reset the default shared sublists from a graphic interface application on the server use
following command:
Login as alcatel user and execute as root user following command:
# rm -Rf /usr/Systems/Global_Instance/WACOMO/udm/data/
importedcounters/*

Current Fault Sublist Counter Area


The Sublist Counter area is composed of a read-only table. The table displays counters
showing the total alarms for the sublist that is selected in the Main Alarm List.
The table displays a row counter for:
• Each alarm severity level (Critical, Major, Minor, Warning, Indeterminate, Cleared)
• The total of non-acknowledged alarms
• The total of cleared alarms
The table displays the following column:
• Total alarms
The Table does not support selection, and there is no contextual menu available.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-15
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Current Fault Sublist Content Area
The sublist content area is a scrollable alarm table displaying attributes on alarms that
meet filter criteria of the selected sublist. Each table row has the severity color of the
alarm that it represents. The sublist content area supports multi-selection. The selected
alarms appear in reverse order.
If the pagination feature is activated by the configuration file (offline), the table is
paginated to display a subset of Alarms. The user has the option to list all of the sublist’s
alarms at once, or to paginate the list. The user can toggle between these two modes by
checking the Paginate Sublist menu item on or off in the View menu.
Paginated lists can be navigated through using the Alarms pagination panel under the
table. If the pagination is not activated, the Alarms pagination panel is hidden.
The Alarms pagination panel is made of:
• Previous and Next Page buttons (arrow to the left/arrow to the right) move to the
next or previous page of alarms. The Currently Displayed Range combination box
changes to reflect the range of the new page of alarms.
• Currently Displayed Range combination box displays the current alarm item range
loaded into the sublist and allows direct navigation to a different range within the total
alarm list.
• The read-only Total field displays the current total alarms in the sublist.
• Alarm count per page field allows the user to set the number of alarms per page. The
user may enter a number, then hit the Enter key in order to validate the number of
alarms per page. The Currently Displayed Range combination box changes to reflect
the new range of the page of alarms.
By default, the table content is refreshed in real-time according to incoming alarms. By
using a Freeze/Unfreeze option available from the View menu or from a button in the
Toolbar, the user can modify the dynamic behavior of the current alarm display in the
sublists. If the user freezes the view, the sublist display remains unchanged until the user
chooses to unfreeze it. When the user exits the application, the freeze mode is not
persisted. Hence, by default, when the current main window is launched, the sublist
content area is in the Unfreeze option mode.
When the auto-select option is activated in the View menu, the incoming alarm appears
automatically selected in the table. This option is not sensitive when the freeze mode is
enabled.

Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields


The following fields are displayed in the Current Fault Sublist Content Area in the
Current Fault GUI. You can use the scrollable bar to view all of the fields displayed.
These fields can also be viewed by placing the mouse over any item in the displayed
table.
• Perceived Severity
• Event Date and Time
• Friendly Name
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-16 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Alarm Type
• Probable Cause Name
• Reservation Status
• Clearing Status
• Acknowledgement Status
• Correlation Notification Tag
• Repetition Counter

Current Fault Sublist Content Modifications


The Current Fault Sublist Content table may be customized as follows.
• A user can resize a column and change the column order by click-hold-and-dragging
them.
• The table can be sorted and filtered from the contextual menu available on the header
of the columns.
• By configuration (XML configuration file), it is possible to define the table's resize
policy as follows:
– Fill - The sublist table takes all of the available size within the area.
– Autosize - The sublist table fits the column size according to the contents.
– Fix size - The column size is fixed in the XML table definition file.
In all previous cases, if the table size is bigger than the available space, a scroll bar
automatically appears. When the user modifies the order of the displayed attributes or the
sort, the definition of the sublist is then automatically updated at the server level (sublist
definition).

Current Fault Sublist User Preferences


The following customizable attributes are saved in user preferences:
• List and order of visible columns (inside sublist definition)
• Sorting criteria (inside sublist definition)
• Pagination state (on/off)
• Alarm count per page

Current Fault Sublist Content Contextual Menus


Right clicking on an alarm opens a contextual menu with the following items and select
the alarm.
• More Info
• Correlated Alarms
• Trouble Ticket
• Acknowledge
• Unacknowledge
• Reserve
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-17
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Reserve and Assign
• Unreserve
• Manual Clear
• Manual Purge
• Export
• Print
• External Applications
Correlated Alarm Menu Option
The Correlated Alarms menu option had two items: File and Tools. The File option has
only one sublevel menu option: Close. The Tools option has the following sublevel menu
options:
• Remove Selection
• Remove All
• Show
Sublevel menu options include:
– All
– Information
– Warning
– Error
• Sort
Sublevel menu options include:
– None
– Severity
– Counter

Current Fault GUI Menus


Current Fault GUI menus have cascading (expanding) menus that have an arrow
following the menu item, while their submenus have an arrow preceding the menu item.
The following items are on the menu bar of the Current Fault GUI:
• “Current Fault File Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Current Fault Edit Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Current Fault View Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Current Fault Sublist Menu” (p. 2-20)
• “Current Fault Alarm Menu” (p. 2-22)
• “Current Fault Alarm Sources Menu” (p. 2-23)
• “Current Fault Window Menu” (p. 2-23)
• “Current Fault Help Menu” (p. 2-23)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-18 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Current Fault File Menu
The following items are displayed on the Current Fault File menu:
• Open New Window - If no sublist is selected, this item opens a new FM Current
Primary Window identical to the current one. Otherwise, for each selected sublist, this
item opens one new FM Current Primary window into which the alarms list of the
selected sublists is displayed.
• Save preferences - Saves the user preferences in the FM server part for later reuse.
• Export - Opens the Export secondary window to export the selected alarms or a set of
discontinued alarm pages in a text file.
• Print - Opens the Print secondary window to print the selected alarms or a set of
discontinued alarm pages.
• Close - Closes the current primary window. This item is only enabled when more than
one primary window is opened.
• Exit - Closes all FM Current windows and exits the application. If the connection to
User Data Manager (UDM) is established, user data, such as sublists, filters, sorts, and
triggers, are saved.

Current Fault Edit Menu


The following items are displayed on the Current Fault Edit menu:
• Copy - Copies the selected text string to the clipboard.
• Select all - Regardless of the current focus area, all rows in the table become selected.
• Deselect all - Regardless of the current focus area, all rows in the table become
deselected.
• Clear Current Message Panel - Clears the Current Message Panel.

Current Fault View Menu


The following items are displayed on the Current Fault View menu:
• Freeze data - Freezes the update of data in the sublist counter area. The default value
is unchecked.
• Inactive sublists - Hides or shows the Inactive sublists in the Counter Summary area.
When the associated check box is checked, the inactive sublists are displayed. The
default value is checked.
• Paginate sublist - Enables or disables the sublist pagination. The default value is
checked.
• Auto-Select - Automatically selects the incoming alarms in the sublist content area.
The default value is unchecked. This item is only enabled when freeze data is
disabled.
• Auto-Raise - When the check box is checked the window, alarms are automatically
raised by an incoming alarm. The default value is unchecked.
• Text Multi-Lines - When the check box is checked, the “n” characters are used to
format displayed text in multiline style. The default value is unchecked.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-19
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Sublist Summary Area - Hides or shows the Counter Summary area. When the
associated check box is checked, the area is displayed. The default value is checked.
• Sublist Counters Area - Hides or shows the Sublist Counter area. When the
associated check box is checked, the area is displayed. The default value is checked.
• Sublist Content Area - Hides or shows the Sublist Content area. When the associated
check box is checked, the area is displayed. The default value is checked.
• Toolbar - Hides or shows the toolbar. When the associated check box is checked, the
element is displayed. The default value is checked.
• Message Area - Hides or shows the Message Area. When the associated check box is
checked, the area is displayed. The default value is checked.

Current Fault Sublist Menu


The following items are displayed on the Current Fault Sublist menu:
• Modify - Opens the properties secondary window with the selected sublist. This item
is only enabled when a sublist is selected in the Counter Summary area.
• New - A window is displayed in order to input the name of the new sublist before
processing the creation of it. If a sublist is selected, the new sublist is a copy of the
selected sublist; otherwise, it is a copy of the default sublist. If the given new sublist
name already exists, then a dialog window warns the user.
• Activate - The counter values of the selected sublist are now activated. The counter
value appears in the cell table of the counter summary area instead of “x”. This item is
only enabled when one or more sublists are selected.
• Deactivate - The counter values of the selected sublists are now deactivated. The
counter values are hidden and replaced by “x” in the cell table of the counter
summary area. This item is only enabled when one or more sublists are selected.
• Delete - A confirmation message is displayed before processing the deletion of the
selected sublists. Then the selected sublists disappear from the counter summary list.
If the Main or the Default sublists are selected, they are not deleted. This item is only
enabled when one or more sublists, which are not the main or the Default sublists, are
selected.
Modify Filter Criteria
In the Modify Window, one Tab is designated for changing filtering criteria. In the New
Filter and Edit Filter windows, the following filter criteria can be accessed by clicking on
the More button. Each time the More button is clicked, additional filtering criteria are
displayed, usually in the order listed below:
• Perceived Severity
• Acknowledgement Status
• Alarm Source
• Alarm Type
• Clearable Status
• Clearing Status
• Correlated Notification Flag

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-20 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Event Date and Time
• Expiration Status
• Friendly Name/Managed Object Instance
• Managed Object Class
• Probable Cause Name
• Repetition Counter
• Reservation Status
• Specific Problems
• Trouble Ticket Creation Flag
• Trouble Ticket ID
Modify Filter Operator Criteria
In the Modify Window, there is drop-down menu from which to choose the operator for
the new or edited filtering rule. Some options follow. Options available depend on the
filtering criteria selections made.
• Equals
• Not Equals
• Subset of
• Not Subset of
• Superset of
• Not Superset of
• Null Intersection
• Not Null Intersection
• Base (MOI)
• Subtree (MOI)
• Equals (FN)
• Substring (FN)
• Begins with (FN)
• Ends with (FN)
• Different (FN)
• Matches (FN)
• Does Not Match (FN)
• Several Conditions
Modify Filter Sort Criteria
In the Modify Window, there is drop-down menu from which to choose the type of
sorting criteria for the edited filtering rule. Some options follow. Options available
depend on the filtering criteria selections made.
• Newest
• Oldest

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-21
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Standard
• Friendly Name
• Least Severe
• Most Severe

Current Fault Alarm Menu


The following items are displayed on the Current Fault Alarm menu:
• More Info - Opens the More Alarms information secondary window obtain the full
information about the selected alarms. This item is only enabled when one or more
alarms is selected in the Sublist Content area.
• Correlated Alarms - Opens a new Primary Window displaying only the sublist
content area dedicated to the Correlated Alarms. This item is only enabled when one
alarm is selected in the Sublist Content area.
• Reserve - A confirmation message is displayed before sending a reserve request to the
server for each selected alarm. This item is only enabled when one or more alarms is
selected in the Sublist Content area.
• Reserve and Assign - A confirmation message is displayed to allow the entry of the
User Name to which selected alarms will be assigned, before sending a reserve
request to the server for each selected alarm. This item is only enabled when one or
more alarms is selected in the Sublist Content area.
• Unreserve - A confirmation message is displayed before sending an unreserve request
to the server for each selected alarm. This item is only enabled when one or more
alarms is selected in the Sublist Content area.
• Trouble Ticket (TT) - A confirmation message is displayed before sending a TT
creation request to the server for each selected alarm. This item is only enabled when
one or more alarms is selected in the Sublist Content area.
• Acknowledge - A confirmation message is displayed before sending an acknowledge
request to the server for each selected alarm. This item is only enabled when one or
more alarms is selected in the Sublist Content area.
• Unacknowledge - A confirmation message is displayed before sending an
unacknowledge request to the server for each selected alarm. This item is only
enabled when one or more alarms is selected in the Sublist Content area.
• Manual Purge - A confirmation message is displayed before sending a purge request
to the server for each selected alarm. This item is only enabled when one or more
alarms is selected in the Sublist Content area.
• Manual Clear - A confirmation message is displayed before sending a clear request to
the server for each selected alarm. This item is only enabled when one or more alarms
is selected in the Sublist Content area.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-22 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Current Fault Alarm Sources Menu
The following items are displayed on the Current Fault Alarm Sources menu:
• Administration - Displays a submenu for choosing an alarm source. Then, the Fault
Management Administration window is launched.
• Synchronization - Displays a submenu for choosing an alarm source. Then a
confirmation message is displayed before processing to the synchronization with the
selected alarm source. The progress bar is activated to indicate that the operation is in
progress. All report messages received from the IM are traced inside the message
area.
One of the Synchronization submenu items listed is All. This item sends a synchronize
request on all alarm sources.

Current Fault Window Menu


The following items are displayed on the Current Fault Window menu:
• FM Historical - Opens a new window - the Fault Management Historical primary
window.
• External Application - Displays a submenu allowing the user to choose a target
external application. Then, a navigation message including alarm information is sent
to the selected application. This item is only enabled when an alarm is selected in the
Sublist Content area.

Current Fault Help Menu


The following items are displayed on the Current Fault Help menu:
• Help - Launches the online documentation and displays the appropriate information in
the user guide for the current screen.
• About Fault Management - Displays a dialog box containing details about the current
FM version.

Current Fault GUI Toolbar


The Current Fault GUI Toolbar can be shown or hidden using a menu item, or through
configuration files by the administrator. When the GUI is modified through the
configuration file (offline), the customization is final. For example, if the integrator
configures the toolbar as hidden in the configuration file, the shown/hidden functions are
no longer available from the Edit menu. Each icon in the toolbar performs the same
behavior as the corresponding menu item.
The following figure depicts the icons on the Current Fault GUI toolbar.

Figure 2-3 Current Fault GUI Toolbar Icons

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-23
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Current Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following lists the icons that appear on the Current Fault Toolbar, from left to right.
Some icons may not appear based on setting in the configuration file.
• Toggles to other windows
• Copies selected item
• Shows/hides Sublists Summary Area
• Shows/hides Sublist Counters Area
• Shows/hides Sublist Content View Area
• Shows/hides the Toolbar
• Shows/hides the Message area
• Opens More Alarm Information Window with the selected alarm
• Shows Correlated Alarms for the selected item
• Reserves the selected alarm
• Reserves and assigns the selected alarm
• Unreserves the selected alarm
• Trouble Tickets the selected alarm
• Acknowledges the selected alarm
• Unacknowledges the selected alarm
• Purges the selected alarm
• Clears the selected alarm

Historical Fault GUI


Historical Fault
Alarms that are identified as historical are described in this section.

Historical Fault GUI Primary Window


The Historical Fault GUI Primary Window layout and all associated window areas are the
same as the Current Fault GUI Primary Window. See “Current Fault GUI Primary
Window” (p. 2-13) for related information.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-24 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Historical Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Historical Fault Counter Summary Area
The Counter Summary area is composed of a scrollable read-only sublist table. Each row
represents a sublist with the following columns:
• Sublist Name is in bold when the sublist is activated. Inactive sublists have all of their
counters set to “x” and may be hidden using an item of the view menu. The Main
alarm and Default sublists are specifically used by the FM web platform, which
means they cannot be deleted.
• Total is the total number of alarms for the sublist
• Critical, Major, …. represent the alarm distribution per severity level or status
(Cleared and Unacknowledged)
The counter summary table supports multiple selections.

Historical Fault Counter Summary Modifications


Historical Fault Counter Summary Modifications information is the same as Current Fault
Counter Summary Modifications. See “Current Fault Counter Summary Modifications”
(p. 2-14) for related information.

Historical Fault Counter Summary User Preferences


Historical Fault Counter Summary User Preferences information is the same as Current
Fault Counter Summary User Preferences. See “Current Fault Counter Summary User
Preferences” (p. 2-14) for related information.

Historical Fault Counter Summary Contextual Menus


Historical Fault Counter Summary Contextual Menus information is the same as Current
Fault Counter Summary Contextual Menus, with one exception. The Activate menu item
is not available for Historical Fault alarms. See “Current Fault Counter Summary
Contextual Menus” (p. 2-15) for related information.

Historical Fault Sublist Counter Area


Historical Fault Sublist Counter Area information is the same as Current Fault Sublist
Counter Area. See “Current Fault Sublist Counter Area” (p. 2-15) for related information.

Historical Fault Sublist Content Area


The Historical Fault sublist content area is a scrollable alarm table displaying attributes
on alarms that meet filter criteria of the selected sublist.
If the pagination feature is activated by the configuration file (off-line), the table is
paginated to display a subset of Alarms. The user has the option to list all of the sublist’s
alarms at once, or to paginate the list. The user can toggle between these two modes by
checking the Paginate Sublist menu item on or off in the View menu.
Paginated lists can be navigated using the Alarms pagination panel under the table. If the
pagination is not activated, the Alarms pagination panel is hidden.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-25
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Historical Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alarms pagination panel is made of:
• Previous and Next Page buttons (arrow to the left/arrow to the right) move to the
next or previous page of alarms. The Currently Displayed Range combination box
changes to reflect the range of the new page of alarms.
• The Currently Displayed Range combination box displays the current alarm item
range loaded into the sublist and allows direct navigation to a different range within
the total alarm list.
• The read-only Total field displays the current total alarms in the sublist.
• The Alarm count per page field allows the user to set the number of alarm per page.
The user may enter a number, and then press the Enter key in order to validate the
number of alarms per page. The Currently Displayed Range combination box changes
to reflect the new range of the page of alarms.

Historical Fault Sublist Content Modifications


Historical Fault Sublist Content Modifications information is the same as Current Fault
Sublist Content Modifications, with one exception: No modifications to the alarm are
allowed. See “Current Fault Sublist Content Modifications” (p. 2-17) for related
information.

Historical Fault Sublist User Preferences


Historical Fault Sublist User Preferences information is the same as Current Fault Sublist
User Preferences. See “Current Fault Sublist User Preferences” (p. 2-17) for related
information.

Historical Fault Sublist Content Contextual Menus


Right-clicking on an alarm opens a contextual menu with the following items and select
the alarm.
• More Info
• Export
• Print

Historical Fault GUI Menus


Historical Fault GUI menus have cascading (expanding) menus that have an arrow
following the menu item, while their sub-menus have an arrow preceding the menu item.
The following items are on the menu bar of the Historical Fault GUI:
• “Historical Fault File Menu” (p. 2-27)
• “Historical Fault Edit Menu” (p. 2-27)
• “Historical Fault View Menu” (p. 2-27)
• “Historical Fault Sublist Menu” (p. 2-27)
• “Historical Fault Alarm Menu” (p. 2-27)
• “Historical Fault Archive Menu” (p. 2-28)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-26 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Historical Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• “Historical Fault Window Menu” (p. 2-28)
• “Historical Fault Help Menu” (p. 2-28)

Historical Fault File Menu


Historical Fault File Menus information is the same as Current Fault File Menus, with one
exception. The term Historical should be substituted for the term Current in the
explanations of the items. See “Current Fault Counter Summary Contextual Menus”
(p. 2-15) for related information.

Historical Fault Edit Menu


Historical Fault Edit Menu information is the same as Current Fault Edit Menu. See
“Current Fault Edit Menu” (p. 2-19) for related information.

Historical Fault View Menu


Historical Fault View Menus information is the same as Current Fault View Menus, with
the following exceptions. Note: None of the following items apply to Historical alarms.
• Freeze data
• Auto-Select
• Auto-Raise
See “Current Fault View Menu” (p. 2-19) for related information.

Historical Fault Sublist Menu


Historical Fault Sublist Menu information is the same as Current Fault Sublist Menu. See
“Current Fault Sublist Menu” (p. 2-20) for related information.

Historical Fault Alarm Menu


The following items are the only item that is displayed on the Historical Fault Alarm
menu:
• More Info - Opens the More Alarms information secondary window to get full
information about the selected alarms. This item is only enabled when one or more
alarms is selected in the Sublist Content area.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-27
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Historical Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Historical Fault Archive Menu
The following item is displayed on the Historical Fault Archive menu:
• Retrieve from public archive - Displays a submenu allowing the user to choose an
archive type
– Local - Opens a window for choosing the filter for retrieving alarms from the local
public archive.
– IM - Opens a window for choosing the filter for retrieving alarms from the given
IM.
• Retrieve from User File - Opens a window for choosing which user files are to be
selected from which to retrieve data.
• Remove User File - Opens a window for choosing user files to remove.

Historical Fault Window Menu


Historical Fault Window Menu information is the same as Current Fault Window Menu.
See “Current Fault Window Menu” (p. 2-23) for related information.

Historical Fault Help Menu


Historical Fault Help Menu information is the same as Current Fault Help Menu. See
“Current Fault Help Menu” (p. 2-23) for related information.

Historical Fault GUI Toolbar


The Historical Fault GUI Toolbar can be shown or hidden using a menu item by the
end-user, or through configuration files by the administrator. When the GUI is modified
through the configuration file (offline), the customization is final. For example, if the
integrator configures the toolbar as hidden in the configuration file, the shown/hidden
functions are no longer available from the Edit menu. Each icon in the toolbar performs
the same behavior as the corresponding menu item.
The following figure depicts the icons on the Historical Fault GUI toolbar

Figure 2-4 Historical Fault GUI Toolbar

By default, the following icons appear on the Historical Fault Toolbar, from left to right.
• Toggles to other windows
• Copies selected item
• Shows/hides Sublists Summary Area
• Shows/hides Sublist Counters Area
• Shows/hides Sublist Content View Area
• Shows/hides the Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-28 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Historical Fault GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Shows/hides the Message area
• Opens More Alarm Information Window with the selected alarm

Secondary Fault Windows


Secondary Fault
The following secondary windows are described in this section:
• “More Alarm Information Window” (p. 2-29)
• “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30)
• “Filter Configuration Window” (p. 2-31)
• “Sublist Properties Window” (p. 2-33)

More Alarm Information Window


The More Alarm Information window allows the user to display all of the attributes of a
list of selected alarms. It can be launched from the sublist content area by right-clicking
on an item in the table, or from the appropriate icon in the icon toolbar. A check box
allows the user to set the Alarm Information window to perform dynamic updates of the
selected alarms according to the selection in the main window. The displayed alarm
information may be dynamically updated or not according to the Freeze/Unfreeze option
state in the main view.
Working Area Description
The More Alarm Information window is comprised of the following:
• At the top of the window, the scrollable selected alarm list is displayed. The first
alarm is selected by default when the window is opened. The user can select the alarm
in the list:
– by scrolling and clicking
– by using the arrow-down and arrow-up keys
• At the left of the Alarm List, the rank in the list is displayed.
• At the center part of the Alarm List, the Alarm information area is displayed with:
– A View drop-down menu to select the information set to display about the alarm
in the table below. Options are: Identify, Events, Diagnosis, Backup, Attribute,
Threshold, Correlation, State Change, and Additional Information.
– A Dynamic Update Check Box component to set the Alarm Information window
to perform dynamic updates of the selected alarms according to the selection in
the main window.
– A scrollable Attributes and Values list.
• Below the attributes list a button to expand the window in order to view or edit user
Notes on the alarm. To the left of the button is an indicator that appears if a note
exists on the alarm, and a timestamp of when the note was placed there. The Apply
Notes button allows the user to validate the user note modification.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-29
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Secondary Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• The External Applications area with:
– A To drop-down list to set the target application.
– A Navigate button to send a navigation message including alarm information.
• Four buttons:
– The Print button opens the Print window to print the selected alarms.
– The Export button opens the Export window to export the selected alarms in a
text file.
– The Close button closes the window.
– The Help button launches the online documentation.

Filter List Panel Window


The Filter List Panel is launched by clicking a Filter Tab in any number of windows. The
Filter List Panel allows the user to select active filters from the list of available filters in
the filter repository and to use the command buttons on the top to either Delete or Edit
them. The user can also create new filters in the repository. The New and Edit buttons
launch the filter configuration window, as described in “Filter Configuration Window”
(p. 2-31).
The Filter List Panel is used to:
• Modify the sublist definition from the filter repositories (two repositories for Basic
and Extended Filters per user)
• Modify in IM administration the definition of the Archiving filter, Auto Purge,
Auto-TT, Auto Ack, Aging, and Trigger from the unique Administration filter
repository
• Define the active filter to retrieve alarms from archive in the Historical GUI
The Filter List Panel is used in two ways in the filter definition process:
• In the Basic filter definition part from the Basic User filter repository (one repository
per user). In this case, only one filter is selectable in the list. For more details, see
“Basic Filter Sub-Tabbed Pane” (p. 2-35).
• In the Extended filter definition part from the Extended User filter repository (one
repository per user). In this case, several filters are selectable in the list and a logical
OR "Match any" operator is applied on the selected list. For more details, see
“Extended Filter Sub-Tabbed Pane” (p. 2-35).
Working Area Description
The working area is made of three parts:
• In the top part, three buttons are shown (New, Edit, and Delete) which allow the user
to create, modify, or delete filters. If a filter is selected before clicking on the New
button, then the Filter configuration window appears with the definition of the
selected filter in order to create a new filter which is a copy of the selected one. The
Delete and Edit buttons are enabled only when a filter is selected in the list. When the
user asks for a filter deletion, a confirmation is requested. The action performed by

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-30 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Secondary Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
using the three buttons is not applied at the server side before the user applies them
(using the Apply button). For example, when the user deletes a filter, then the selected
filter is deleted from the graphical list. But the deletion of the filter from the
repository is effective (on the server side) only after having clicked on the Apply
button.
• In the center part, a table displays a filter list. This is a list of all existing filters. Each
filter of this list may be selected in order to edit or delete it. Multiple selection is not
allowed. This table contains three columns:
– The Filter Names column in read-only mode displays the name of the filters.
– The Active column contains a check box which allows the user to select
(associate), or not select, the corresponding filter.
– The Rules column in read-only mode displays the rule (that is, the logical
equation) defined by the filter.
• In the bottom part, the Description text field displays a short description of the
selected filter. This field is in read-only mode.

Filter Configuration Window


The Filter Configuration window is launched from one of many windows by following
the path: Modify Sublist > Filter Tab > New or Edit button. This window allows
operators to create a filter or to modify an existing one, and save the filter to the filter
repository. A Filter is defined by a logical AND Match all filter criteria combination of
filter criteria. The window title of this window changes to match the button that launched
it. For example, it could be either New Filter or Edit Filter.
Working Area Description
The working area is made of:
• In the center part, a modular expandable series of conditions named Filter Criteria
define the filter criterion on which the AND logical operator will be applied in order
to form the filter operation. Each condition has the following syntax and appears on
one line. (Each line defines a condition.) [To be removed] [Not]
<attribute> <operator> <value> where:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-31
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Secondary Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
[To be removed] is used to select the conditions which are to be removed when
performing fewer action.
– [NOT] is the optional NOT operator defined by a check box. If this check box is
selected, then the condition defined by this line is negated.
– <attribute> is the name of an attribute. This name may be chosen among the
list of all possible attributes by using a combination box. This list of all possible
attributes is given by the server. When an attribute is selected, then the fields
<operator> and <value> are updated with values corresponding to the type of the
chosen attribute. An attribute may be selected only one time in the definition of
the Filter criteria. This means that if the user selects a condition, this condition
will no longer be available in the list of possible attributes for future Filter criteria
definition.
– <operator> is an operator depending on the attribute type. This <operator> is
chosen from a list of possible operators defined by a combination box. This list of
possible operators depends on the attribute type.
• <value> is the value given for this attribute. Depending on the selected attribute and
operator, this value may be either:
--a free string defined by the user.
--a value chosen from a list of the possible values. This <value> is either defined by a
text field or by a combination box, depending on the attribute type.
--multiple values. This means that more than one value can be selected for the
condition. Then, a logical OR is applied among all selected values. In this case, an
active button is available at the right side of the value area. This button opens a
secondary window which allows the user to select the multiple values.
• Three buttons named More, Fewer, and Remove All allow the user to add a new
condition to the end of the condition list (button More) or to remove the conditions to
be removed (button Fewer) or remove all conditions (button Remove All).
• The read-only text field named Rule contains the current equation defined by the filter
displayed in this window. This text field is updated in real time each time something
changes in the Filter Criteria panel above.
• In the bottom part, the text field named Description of this filter may be modified by
the user. This is a short description of this filter. This description is displayed for the
selected filter in the Description text field in the Filter list panel.
• Two buttons at the bottom of the window:
– The OK button validates all of the modifications already made. Initially, when the
dialog box is opened, the OK button is disabled (grayed out until the user makes
some changes).
– The Cancel button cancels the current filter creation or modification and closes
the window.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-32 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Secondary Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Event Date and Time
If an Event Date and Time attribute is selected, then:
• The only operator available is Equal.
• The Value text field area is not editable.
• The definition of the time intervals is done from the active button available at the
right side of the value area - the button labeled (+). This button opens a secondary
window which allows the user to define several time intervals. Then, a logical OR
“Match Any” combination is applied on the times intervals.
Each time interval may be defined with one or two conditions:
• From YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
• To YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
• Or both From YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS To YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
A check box in front of each condition allows the user to activate it. Otherwise, the
corresponding Date/Time area is not editable.
The entered values in the Date/Time areas are dynamically checked according to the
workstation's time zone. If the user enters a wrong value, the GUI sends a beep and the
area automatically restores the previous value. Moreover, two arrows at the right side of
the area allow the user to increase or decrease the field value (for instance YYYY or DD
...) on which the cursor is located.

Sublist Properties Window


The sublist properties window allows the user to configure the characteristics of a
selected sublist from the Counter Summary area. If the selected sublist is the Main Alarm
List, the filter definition part is grayed out and not sensitive in order to prevent filter
modification. To launch the Sublist Properties window, you can click on the Type of
alarm in the Counter Summary area, and then follow the path: Sublist > Modify.
It is made of:
• At the top, always visible
– The sublist name field
– Sublist color button. Clicking on the color box launches the JFC Color Chooser
allowing the user to choose the sublist color.
• Four tabbed panes:
– Display
– Filter
– Sort
– Trigger

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-33
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Secondary Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Four buttons at the bottom of the window which are applicable to all of the property
windows and not only to the current visible tabbed pane:
– The Apply button validates all of the modifications already made. Initially, when
the dialog box is opened, the Apply button is disabled (grayed out until the user
makes some changes).
– The Restore button retrieves the values of all fields before modification. If the
user has made changes in the window, even in the filter repository management
(New, Edit and Delete Filter), then a warning Alert dialog box asks if the user
wishes to apply the change before restoring.
– The Close button closes the window. If the user has made changes in the window,
even in the filter repository management (New, Edit and Delete Filter), then a
warning Alert dialog box asks if the user wishes to apply the change before
closing.
– The Help button launches the online documentation.
If the user modifies the sublist name with a name already used, then a warning dialog box
warns the user.
Display Tabbed Pane
The Display Tabbed Pane contains a double list (Hidden Attributes and Displayed
Attributes) to select which attributes should be displayed as columns in the sublist and to
set the display order of these attributes. A set of buttons is placed in the center of the
double list; the > button moves an item to the right, the < button moves an item to the left,
and buttons for Move All Left (<<) and Move All Right (>>) which allows the user to
move all items in one click. The list of displayed attributes has two arrows on the right to
change the order of the elements (move up, or move down).
Filter Tabbed Pane
The Filter Tabbed Pane allows the user to select a filter to be applied to the sublist:
• No Filter: a Match all filter is applied to the sublist and all alarms are included.
• Include alarms matching the following: This allows the user to select the active filter
from the list of available filters in the User filter repository (one filter repository per
user). The filters created and managed from the filter repository are a “Match all Filter
criteria” logical combination.
A Not check box allows the user to negate the user-defined filter. For the description of
the filter list panel and actions on the three buttons (New, Edit, Delete), refer to “Filter
List Panel Window” (p. 2-30) and “Working Area Description” (p. 2-30).
When Extended attributes are defined, this tabbed pane is made of two sub-tabbed panes:
the Basic filter definition tabbed pane and the Extended filter definition described later in
this section. The filter is defined as a logical AND between both sub-tabbed pane
definitions. A global Not check box allows the user to negate the filter defined by both
sub-tabbed panes, and in the bottom part, a read-only text field displays the Global Rule
obtained by a logical AND between rules of selected filters in both sub-tabbed panes.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-34 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Secondary Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Basic Filter Sub-Tabbed Pane
The Basic Filter Sub-Tabbed Pane contains a filter list panel in order to define the Basic
filter definition part. The description of the filter list panel is available in “Filter List
Panel Window” (p. 2-30). It allows the user to select the active filter from the list of
available filters in the User Basic filter repository (one Basic filter repository per user).
The filters created and managed from the Basic filter repository are a “Match all Filter
criteria” logical combination.
For the description of the filter list panel and actions on the three buttons (New, Edit,
Delete), refer to “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30) and “Working Area Description”
(p. 2-30).
Extended Filter Sub-Tabbed Pane
The Extended Filter Sub-Tabbed Pane contains a filter list panel in order to define the
Extended filter definition part. The description of the filter list panel is available in “Filter
List Panel Window” (p. 2-30). It allows the user to select several active filters from the
list of available filters in the User Extended filter repository (one Extended filter
repository per user). Then, a logical OR Match Any combination is applied on the selected
filters. The filters created and managed from the Extended filter repository are a Match
All Filter Criteria logical combination. A Not to all check box allows the user to negate
the filter combination defined in the Extended filter list.
For the description of the filter list panel and actions on the three buttons (New, Edit,
Delete), refer to “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30) and “Working Area Description”
(p. 2-30).
Sort Tabbed Pane
The Sort Tabbed Pane contains a double list (Unselected Sort criteria and Selected Sort
criteria) to choose the attributes lists which are used in the sublist view for sorting the
alarm list. The order in the Selected Sort criteria list defines the sorting order of the
alarms. A set of buttons is placed in the center of the double list; the > button moves an
item to the right, the < button moves an item to the left and buttons for Move All Left
(<<) and Move All Right (>>) which allow the user to move all items in one click. The list
of selected sort criteria has two arrows on the right to change the sorting order (move up
or move down). The sort direction is defined by using a toggle button on the right of each
selected attribute. It is possible to invert this direction by a double click on the toggle
button or by using the contextual menu available on each button.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-35
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Secondary Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trigger Tabbed Pane
This tabbed pane allows the user to configure the trigger of the sublist. It is made of three
parts:
• The Tone part at the top of the panel: This part is made of a toggle button which
allows the user to turn the tone On or Off, a text field to display the path of the played
sound file, and a button which displays the Java File Chooser allowing the user to
choose the sound file. The supported sound files extensions are: mid, wav, rmf and au.
The tone is On if the toggle button is checked. If the specified path for the played
sound file is wrong, or when errors are encountered, a beep is heard instead of the
sound file.
• The Blink part is made of a toggle button which allows the user to turn the blink On or
Off. The blink is On if the toggle button is checked; then the sublist blinks on each
incoming alarm.
• The Trigger part in the middle of the panel, Incoming Alarms Trigger: This part
allows the user to disable or to enable the trigger on incoming alarms and then to
define it. Then, using a combination box, the user chooses an action, Execute or
Navigate:
– The first combination box allows the user to choose the threshold condition
between On incoming alarms or When strictly greater than. In the latter case, a
text field allows the user to enter the number of alarms which defines the
threshold.
– The second combination box allows the user to choose the action activated by the
threshold.
Action Execute is a second combination box option that allows the users to enter
a local machine script or command, to execute, or choose the script or command
to execute from the list of scripts and commands provided by the server.
Action Navigate is a second combination box option that allows the user to
choose the application to navigate to (between a list of applications defined by the
server).
– A third combination box allows the user to choose which attributes must be sent to
the application. The choices are No alarm attribute, All alarm attributes, and
Displayed alarm attributes. This third combination box is only activated if the
second box action selection is Navigate.
• The Trigger part in the bottom of the panel, Outgoing Alarms Trigger: This part has
the same definition for the preceding Trigger part except that the trigger is defined on
outgoing alarms and for the threshold part which is given here by When strictly
smaller than instead of When strictly greater than.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-36 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Administration Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Administration Fault Windows


General Administration FM Information
The Administration window allows the user to administrate a selected current IM known
by the server. This dialog box is launched by following the path: Alarm Sources >
Administration > IM. See “Current Fault Alarm Sources Menu” (p. 2-23) for additional
details.
This dialog box contains:
• Tabbed panes for:
– CAL Administration
– Archiving Filter
– Auto Purge
– Auto-TT
– Auto ACK
– Aging
– Trigger
– Severity Change
• Four buttons at the bottom of the window which are applicable to all of the property
windows, not only to the currently visible tabbed pane:
– The Apply button validates all of the modifications already made. Initially when
the dialog box is opened, it is disabled (grayed out until the user makes some
changes).
– The Restore button retrieves the values of all fields before modification.
– The Close button closes the window. If the user has made changes in the window
before applying them, then a warning Alert dialog box asks if the user wishes to
apply the change before closing.
– The Help button launches the online documentation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-37
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Administration Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Filter List Panel on Administration Windows
The Filter List Panel that is displayed on numerous tabbed panes in the Administration
window is the same on each tab. The Filter List Panel is enabled only when the Set a
Personal Filter radio button from the precedent part (Filter option) is selected. This part
is composed of a check box allowing the user to negate the defined filter and has two
tabbed panes:
• Basic Filter Tabbed Pane: This tabbed pane contains a filter list panel in order to
define the Basic filter definition part. The description of the filter list panel is
available in “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30). It allows the user to select the
active filter from the list of available filters in the User Basic filter repository (one
Basic filter repository per user). The filters created and managed from the Basic filter
repository are a Match all Filter criteria logical combination.
• Extended Filter Tabbed Pane: This tabbed pane is visible only when the Extended
Attributes are defined (on the server side). It contains a filter list panel in order to
define the Extended filter definition part. The description of the filter list panel is
available in “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30). It allows the user to select several
active filters from the list of available filters in the User Extended filter repository
(one Extended filter repository per user). Then a logical OR Match Any combination
is applied on the selected filters. The filters created and managed from the Extended
filter repository are a Match all Filter criteria logical combination. A Not to all
check box allows the user to negate the filter combination defined in the Extended
filter list.

Current Alarm List (CAL) Administration Tabbed Pane


The Current Alarm List (CAL) Administration Tabbed Pane allows the user to configure
the Current Alarm List of the concerning IM. It is made of three parts:
• At the top part, the overflow parameters: CAL maximum size, Warning filling
percentage, Overflow action mode, and Overflow purge size. Each of these four
parameters may be modified by the user.
• In the center part, the purging sort criteria parameters displayed are: a double list
(Unselected criteria and Selected criteria) which allows the user to choose the
attributes used for sorting the purge of the alarms of the concerning IM CAL; a set of
buttons are placed in the center of the double list; the > button moves an item to the
right, the < button moves an item to the left, and buttons for Move All Left << and
Move All Right >> which allow the user to move all items in one click.
• In the bottom part, the statistics parameters displayed are: CAL size, the CAL filling
percentage, the CAL status, and the ARS connection status. These four parameters
are read-only parameters. Users cannot modify them. They are displayed to warn the
user about the IM status.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-38 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Administration Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Archive Filter, Auto Purge, Auto TT, and Auto Ack Tabbed Panes
Each one of these tabbed panes allows the user to select the filters for its specific purpose
(Archiving, Auto Purge, Auto-TT, or Auto Ack) with specific options. Each pane is
composed of two parts, for example, on the Archive panel:
• Filter option: This part is composed of different radio buttons allowing the user to
select only one option. The different options are the following:
– No Archive: When selected, a Match None filter is applied on the Archive action.
– Archive All: When selected, a Match all filter is applied on the Archive action.
– Current Filter set on alarm source: This option appears only when there is a
filter already applied on the alarm source and not defined in the User filter
repository, for example, for Administration filters defined on the AS and applied
on the alarm source. This option is accompanied by a read-only text field to
display the filter rule applied on the alarm source.
– Set a personal filter: When selected, this option enables the filter tabbed panes
and allows the user to select the active filter from the list of available filters.
• Filter List Panel: See “Filter List Panel on Administration Windows” (p. 2-38) for
details on Administration windows.
If a user modifies an administration filter in the AS server, while other users have the
corresponding tab open, then a pop-up window warns the user that the current filter was
changed by another user.
When Extended Attributes are defined (on the server side), the filter is defined as a logical
AND between both sub-tabbed pane definitions. A global Not check box allows the user
to negate the filter defined by both sub-tabbed panes and a read-only text field displays
the Global Rule obtained by a logical AND between rules of selected filters in both
sub-tabbed panes.

Aging List Tabbed Pane


The Aging List Tabbed Pane contains the agings list panel. It allows the user to select the
active agings from the list of available agings in the unique Administration aging
repository.
The working area is made of three parts:
• In the top part, three buttons are shown: New, Edit, and Delete, which allow the user
to create, modify or delete agings. If an aging is selected before clicking on the New
button, then the aging configuration window appears with the definition of the
selected aging in order to create a new aging, which is a copy of the selected one. The
Delete and Edit buttons are enabled only when an aging is selected in the list.
• In the center part, a table displays the aging list. This is a list of all existing agings.
Each aging of this list may be selected in order to edit or delete it. Multi-selection is
allowed. This table contains three columns:
– The Active column contains a check box which allows the user the option to
activate the corresponding aging, or not to activate it.
– The Aging Name column in read-only mode displays the name of the aging item.
– The Owner Name column in read-only mode displays the name of the owner.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-39
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Administration Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See “Filter List Panel on Administration Windows” (p. 2-38) for details on Administration
windows.
For the general description of the filter list panel and actions on the three buttons New,
Edit, and Delete, refer to “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30) and “Working Area
Description” (p. 2-30).

Aging Configuration Window


The Aging Configuration Window allows users to create an aging, or to modify an
existing one, and save the aging to the aging repository. The title of this window changes
to match the button in the aging tabbed pane of the Administration window that launched
it, for example, either the Aging Creation window or the Aging Edition window.
This window is made of:
• Two tabbed panes:
– The Definition tabbed pane
– The Filter tabbed pane
• Four buttons - See “General Administration FM Information” (p. 2-37) for details.
Definition Tabbed Pane
The Definition Tabbed Pane allows the user to configure the aging. It is made of the
following parts:
• The Alarm Aging Name: This text area allows the user to define the aging name. In
edition mode, this area is insensitive.
• The On Alarm part in the middle of the panel: This part allows the user to choose the
alarm on which the automatic action is to be applied by specifying its original state
(present or not, acknowledged or not, cleared or not) since a duration.
• The Do part that allows the user to define the automatic action performed on alarms
chosen, such as Acknowledge or Purge.
• The Every area that allows the user to set the frequency of the automatic actions.
Filter Tabbed Pane
The Filter Tabbed Pane allows the user to configure the aging filter. It is made of the
following parts:
• Filter option: This part is composed of different radio buttons allowing the user to
select only one option. The available options are:
– Match None: When selected, a Match None filter is applied on the Aging.
– Match All: When selected, a Match All filter is applied on the Aging.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-40 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Administration Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Current Filter set on alarm source: This option appears only when there is a
filter already applied on the alarm source and not defined in the User filter
repository. This option is accompanied by a read-only text field to display the
filter rule applied on the alarm source.
– Set a personal filter: This option enables the filter tabbed panes and allows the
user to select the active filter from the list of available filter. The description of the
filter list panel is available in “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30).
• Filter List Panel: See “Filter List Panel on Administration Windows” (p. 2-38) for
details on Administration windows.
For the general description of the filter list panel and actions on the three buttons New,
Edit, and Delete, refer to “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30) and “Working Area
Description” (p. 2-30).
When Extended Attributes are defined (on the server side), the filter is defined as a logical
AND between both sub-tabbed panes definition. A global Not check box allows the user
to negate the filter defined by both sub-tabbed panes and a read-only text field displays
the Global Rule obtained by a logical AND between rules of selected filters in both
sub-tabbed panes.

Trigger List Tabbed Pane


This Trigger List Tabbed Pane contains the trigger list panel. It allows the user to select
the active triggers from the list of available triggers in the unique Administration trigger
repository.
The working area is made of three parts:
• In the top part, three buttons are shown: New, Edit, and Delete, which allow the user
to create, modify, or delete triggers. If a trigger is selected before clicking on the New
button, then the trigger configuration window appears with the definition of the
selected trigger in order to create a new trigger, which is a copy of the selected one.
The Delete and Edit buttons are enabled only when a trigger is selected in the list.
• In the center part, a table displays the trigger list. This is a list of all existing triggers.
Each trigger of this list may be selected in order to edit or delete it. Multi-selection is
allowed. This table contains three columns:
– The Active column contains a check box which allows the user to activate the
corresponding trigger, or not to activate it.
– The Trigger Name column in read-only mode displays the name of the trigger.
– The Owner Name column in read-only mode displays the name of the owner.
The action performed by using the three buttons in the trigger list panel (New, Edit, or
Delete) are not applied at the server side before the user applies them using the Apply
button. For example, when the user deletes a trigger, then the selected trigger is deleted
from the graphical list. But the deletion of the trigger from the repository will be effective
(on the server side) only after having clicked on the Apply button.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-41
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Administration Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trigger Configuration Window
The Trigger Configuration Window allows users to create a trigger, or to modify an
existing one, and save the trigger to the trigger repository. The window title of this
window changes to match the button in the trigger tabbed pane of the Administration
window that launched it, for example, either the Trigger Creation or the Trigger Edition
window.
This window is made of:
• Three tabbed panes:
– The Definition tabbed pane
– The Filter tabbed pane
– The Mail/SMS tabbed pane
• Four buttons - See “General Administration FM Information” (p. 2-37) for details.
Definition Tabbed Pane
The Definition Tabbed Pane allows the user to configure the trigger. It is made of three
parts:
• The Alarm Trigger Name: This text area allows the user to define the trigger name. In
edition mode, this area is insensitive.
• The Incoming Alarms Trigger part in the middle of the panel: This part allows the
user to disable or to enable the trigger which has to be activated on incoming alarms,
and then to define it. Then, using a combination box, the user chooses an action:
Execute, Navigate, or Send Mail/SMS.
– The first combination box allows the user to choose the threshold condition
between On all incoming alarms or When greater than. In the latter case, a text
field allows the user to enter the number of alarms which defines the threshold.
– The second combination box allows the user to choose the action activated by the
threshold:
Action Execute is a second combo box that allows the user to enter a local
machine script or command to execute, or to choose the script or command to
execute from the list of scripts and commands provided by the server.
Action Navigate is a second combination box that allows the user to choose the
application to navigate to (between a list of applications defined by the server).
A third combination box allows the user to choose which attributes must be sent to
the application. The choices are no alarm attribute, all alarm attributes, and
displayed alarm attributes. This box is activated when the Action Navigate
option is selected.
– Action Send Mail/SMS: All other combination boxes are disabled, and the
configuration should be done in the Mail/SMS tabbed pane.
Note: The Action Send Mail/SMS should be used with the condition On all
incoming alarms; it is not recommended to use it with the condition When
greater than (since several Mail/SMS may be sent in case of alarms flow).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-42 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Administration Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• The Trigger part in the bottom of the panel, Outgoing Alarms Trigger: The definition
of this part is the same as for the preceding part except for two differences :
– For the threshold part, which is given here by When strictly smaller than instead
of When strictly greater than.
– The user cannot choose the send mail/sms action; there are only two choices:
Execute or Navigate.
Filter Tabbed Pane
In general, the Filter Tabbed Pane window descriptions are the same as the Definition
Tabbed Pane. Refer to “Definition Tabbed Pane” (p. 2-42) for details.
Mail/SMS Tabbed Pane
The Mail/SMS Tabbed Pane allows the user to configure the message (email and/or SMS)
to be sent when the Send Mail/SMS action is chosen, and the trigger execution condition is
reached. It is made of seven parts:
• Type of the message to be sent: email and/or SMS
• Message subject: which applies only to email sending
• Message header: a free text input by the user. It is displayed on the top of the
message. The user can edit the header by typing its text on the text area of the dialog
box shown with an edit action. The message header can also be deleted directly by
performing a delete action.
• Mail addresses list: list of email contacts. The user can add, edit, and remove
contacts. The user can also change the activation state of a contact. The email is sent
only to active contacts.
• Phone numbers list: list of phone contacts. The user can add, edit, and remove
contacts. The user can also change the activation state of a contact. The SMS is sent
only to active contacts.
• Alarm attributes: a double list containing displayed and hidden alarm attributes lists.
Only the displayed attributes list is included to the message.
• Message footer: a free text input by the user. It is displayed on the bottom of the
message. The user can edit the footer by typing its text on the text area of the dialog
box shown with an edit action. The message footer can also be deleted directly by
performing a delete action.
Note: The Message body is built from three parts organized as follows:
• Message header
• Alarm attributes list formatted as : attribute = value
• Message footer
In addition to these inputs, other settings are required for sending emails and SMSes.
For Email:
• Mail server IP address
• Mail server listening port
• User login

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-43
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Administration Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• User password
• Sender mail address
For SMS:
• Service provider account (login, password)
• Service provider mail address
• Subject of the email which will be transmitted by the service provider
Notes:
• The Message Subject maximum length is 255 characters.
• The Message Header and Footer maximum lengths are 1024 characters.
• The Mail Address Name and Email address maximum length is 255 characters.
• The Phone Number Name and Phone Number field maximum length is 255
characters.
• When typing in these fields, since the number of typed characters is less than the
Maximum Length, the field is still editable. Otherwise, it is not editable (except to
delete characters).
• The copy-paste operation (using Ctrl-C/Ctrl-V keyboard tools) is also controlled. If a
copy-paste of a text that exceeds the maximum length is performed, only the first
(maximum length - already existing characters) characters are taken into account.

Severity Change List Tabbed Pane


The Severity Change List Tabbed Pane contains the severity change list panel. It allows
the user to select the active severity change from the list of available severity changes in
the unique Administration severity change repository.
The working area is made of three parts:
• In the top part, three buttons shown are New, Edit, and Delete, which allow the user
to create, modify, or delete severity change. If a severity change is selected before
clicking on the New button, then the severity change configuration window appears
with the definition of the selected severity change in order to create a new severity
change, which is a copy of the selected one. The Delete and Edit buttons are enabled
only when a severity change is selected in the list.
• In the center part, a table displays the severity change list. This is a list of all existing
severity changes. Each severity change of this list may be selected in order to edit or
delete it. Multi-selection is allowed. This table contains three columns:
– The Active column contains a check box which allows the user to activate the
corresponding severity change, or not to activate it.
– The Severity Change Name column, in read-only mode, displays the name of the
severity change.
– The Owner Name column in read-only mode displays the name of the owner.
For the general description of the filter list panel and actions on the three buttons New,
Edit, and Delete, refer to “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30) and “Working Area
Description” (p. 2-30).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-44 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Administration Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Change Configuration Window
The Severity Change Configuration Window allows users to create a severity change, or
to modify an existing one, and save the severity change to the severity change repository.
The title of this window changes to match the button in the severity change tabbed pane
of the Administration window that launched it, for example, either the Severity Change
Creation or the Severity Change Edition window.
This window is made of:
• Two tabbed panes:
– The Definition tabbed pane
– The Filter tabbed pane
• Four buttons - See “General Administration FM Information” (p. 2-37) for details.
Definition Tabbed Pane
The Definition Tabbed Pane allows the user to configure the severity change. It is made
of two parts:
• The Alarm Severity Change Name: This text area allows the user to define the
severity change name. In edition mode, this area is insensitive.
• The On alarm part allows the user to define the severity which will be applied to all
alarms matching the defined filters.
Filter Tabbed Pane
The Filter Tabbed Pane allows the user to configure the severity change filter. It is made
of two parts:
• Filter option: This part is composed of different radio buttons allowing the user to
select only one option. The different options are:
– Match None: When selected, a Match None filter is applied on the severity
change.
– Match All: When selected, a Match All filter is applied on the severity change.
– Current Filter set on alarm source: This option appears only when there is a
filter already applied on the alarm source and not defined in the User filter
repository. This option is accompanied by a read-only text field to display the
filter rule applied on the alarm source.
– Set a personal filter: This option enables the filter tabbed panes, and allows the
user to select the active filter from the list of available filter. The description of the
filter list panel is available in “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30).
• Filter List Panel: See “Filter List Panel on Administration Windows” (p. 2-38) for
details on Administration windows.
For the general description of the filter list panel and actions on the three buttons New,
Edit, and Delete, refer to “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30) and “Working Area
Description” (p. 2-30).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 2-45
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Concepts Administration Fault Windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When Extended Attributes are defined (on the server side), the Filter is defined as a
logical AND between both sub-tabbed panes definition. A global Not check box allows
the user to negate the filter defined by both sub-tabbed panes, and a read-only text field
displays the Global Rule obtained by a logical AND between rules of selected filters in
both sub-tabbed panes.

Print Management Window


The Print Management window contains two areas:
• Alarms sources: This area allows choosing which set of alarms are printed: selected
alarms from the subsist content viewer, or alarms in pages in the range specified
according to the syntax: begin_pageend_ page.
• XSLT File source: This area allows choosing which set of alarm attributes are printed.
The user can select one of three alternatives:
– Use default: Print default attributes
– Displayed attributes: Print the currently displayed attributes
– Other Xslt File: Print attributes specified in an personalized XSLT file

Export Management Window


This window contains three areas:
• Alarms sources: This area allows choosing which set of alarms are exported: selected
alarms from the subsist content viewer, or alarms in pages in the range specified
according to the syntax: begin_pageend_ page.
• XSLT File source: This area allows choosing which set of alarm attributes are
exported. The user can select one of three alternatives:
– Use default: Export default attributes
– Displayed attributes: Export the currently displayed attributes
– Other XSLT File: Export attributes specified in a personalized XSLT file
• Export File destination: This area allows specifying the file which contains the
exported data.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-46 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
3 Fault Management Tasks
3

Overview
Purpose
Fault Management tasks discussed in this chapter pertain to common Fault Management
features across the 1350 OMS and to Current Alarms only. Fault Management tasks that
are application-specific are discussed in the applicable application documents.
For Correlated Fault Management (CFM) concepts, see Chapter 2, “Fault Management
Concepts”.

Contents

Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms 3-3


Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Historical Alarms 3-4
Navigate to FM from Another Application 3-5
Navigate from FM from Another Application 3-6
Access Specific Alarm Sublists 3-7
Freeze Data on an Alarm List 3-8
View Inactive Sublists 3-9
Paginate Alarm Sublists 3-10
Select Incoming Alarms Automatically 3-11
Automatically Raise an AS Window 3-12
View Text Multi-Lines 3-13
Show/Hide Alarm List Areas 3-14
Create an Alarm Sublist 3-16
Modify an Alarm Sublist 3-18
Activate Alarm Sublist Counters 3-26
Deactivate Alarm Sublist Counters 3-27
Delete Alarm Sublists 3-28
View More Information About an Alarm 3-29

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-1
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reserve Alarms 3-31


Reserve and Assign Alarms 3-32
Unreserve Alarms 3-34
Trouble Ticket Alarms 3-35
Acknowledge Alarms 3-36
Unacknowledge Alarms 3-37
Manually Purge an Alarm 3-38
Manually Clear an Alarm 3-39
Export Output of an Alarm 3-41
Print Output of an Alarm 3-43
Administer Alarm Sources 3-45
Synchronize Alarm Sources 3-62
Manage Alarm Debouncing 3-63

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-2 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms


When to use
Use this task to access the Fault Management (FM) GUI component for Current Alarms.
All tasks in this chapter with the exception of “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for
Historical Alarms” (p. 3-4) are written for Current Alarms.
Note: When accessing any aspects of Fault Management, this is the second task that
you should perform to gain component access. See the 1350 OMS Getting Started
Guide for information on accessing the Web Portal, which is the first step required to
access the FM GUI.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “FM Component Overview” (p. 2-1)

Before you begin


This task does not have any preconditions.

Task
Complete the following steps to access the FM GUI component.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:


• In the left panel, select Operation > Alarms or just select Alarms.
• In the Main View panel, select the Operation icons and then select the Alarms icon.
Result: The Main window of the FM component is opened for Current Alarms.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-3
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Historical Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Historical Alarms


When to use
Use this task to access the Fault Management (FM) GUI component for Historical
Alarms.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “FM Component Overview” (p. 2-1)
• “Historical Alarm Management” (p. 2-8)
• “Historical Fault GUI” (p. 2-24)

Before you begin


This task does not have any preconditions.

Task
Complete the following steps to access the FM GUI component for Historical Alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:


• In the left panel, select Operation > Alarms or just select Alarms.
• In the Main View panel, select the Operation icon and then select the Alarms icon.
Result: Various icons appear in the Main View of the FM Current panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Follow the path: Window > FM Historical....


Result: The system navigates to the FM Historical Alarms GUI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Optional. Select one of the items from the Archive drop-down menu. Options are:
• Retrieve from Public Archive
• Retrieve from User File
• Remove User File
Result: Depending on your selection, various windows are displayed for further input.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Optional. To return to the FM Current GUI, follow the path: Window > FM Current.
Result: You are returned to the FM Current GUI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Navigate to FM from Another Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Navigate to FM from Another Application


When to use
Use this task to navigate to the Fault Management (FM) application from another
application. This task is written to navigate from the Multi Service GUI.

Related Information
See the following topic in this document:
• “FM Component Overview” (p. 2-1)

Before you begin


This task does not have any preconditions.

Task
Complete the following steps to navigate to the FM application from the Multi Service
GUI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Multi Service GUI, select an NE.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Right-click on the NE selected in Step 1.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select Show NE Alarms from the drop-down menu.


Result: A window is displayed listing the alarms for the selected NE.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-5
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Navigate from FM from Another Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Navigate from FM from Another Application


When to use
Use this task to navigate from the Fault Management (FM) component to another 1350
OMS application.

Related Information
See the following topic in this document:
• “FM Component Overview” (p. 2-1)

Before you begin


This task does not have any preconditions.

Task
Complete the following steps to navigate from the FM component to another 1350 OMS
application.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From Fault Management component, highlight an item in the Sublist Content area table.
Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select External Applications. Make another selection from the next drop-down menu that
is displayed.
Result: You are navigated from the FM component to the selection made in this step.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Access Specific Alarm Sublists

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access Specific Alarm Sublists


When to use
Use this task to access specific Alarm Sublists in the Sublist Content area.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault View Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Current Fault GUI Primary Window” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Sublist Counter Area” (p. 2-15)
• “Current Fault Counter Summary Area” (p. 2-14)

Before you begin

Task
Complete the following steps to display updated data in the Sublist Counters area of an
Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Counter Summary area (far upper left corner of the main window), select on any
one of the Sublists displayed. Options are:
• Main Alarm List
• Default Alarm Sublist
• Critical
• Major
• Minor
• Warning
• Indeterminate
• Cleared
• (Names of Sublists that You Have Created)
Result: The data in the Sublist Content area to the right of the Counter Summary area
is updated displaying information for only the Sublist type that you selected.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-7
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Freeze Data on an Alarm List

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Freeze Data on an Alarm List


When to use
Use this task to freeze updated data in the Sublist Counters area of an Alarm List.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault View Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Sublist Counter Area” (p. 2-15)

Before you begin

Task
Complete the following steps to freeze displayed updated data in the Sublist Counters
area of an Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Follow the path: View > Freeze Data.


Note: The default value is unchecked.
Result: The data in the Sublist Counter is frozen.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-8 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks View Inactive Sublists

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

View Inactive Sublists


When to use
Use this task to view Inactive Sublists in the Counter Summary area on an Alarm List.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault View Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Sublist Counter Area” (p. 2-15)

Before you begin

Task
Complete the following steps to view Inactive Sublists in the Counter Summary area on
an Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Follow the path: View > Inactive Sublists.


Note: The default value is checked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Ensure that the Inactive Sublist option is checked.


Result: When the associated check box is checked, the Inactive Sublists are displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-9
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Paginate Alarm Sublists

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Paginate Alarm Sublists


When to use
Use this task to paginate Sublists on an Alarm List.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault View Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Sublist Counter Area” (p. 2-15)

Before you begin

Task
Complete the following steps to paginate Sublists on an Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Follow the path: View > Paginate Sublist.


Note: The default value is checked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Ensure that the Paginate Sublist option is checked.


Result: When the associated check box is checked, the Sublists are paginated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-10 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Select Incoming Alarms Automatically

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Incoming Alarms Automatically


When to use
Use this task to automatically select Incoming Alarms in the Sublist Content area of the
Alarm List.
Note: This item is only enabled when freeze data is disabled.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault View Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Sublist Counter Area” (p. 2-15)

Before you begin

Task
Complete the following steps to automatically select Incoming Alarms in the Sublist
Content area of the Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Ensure that the Freeze Data option under the View menu is unchecked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Follow the path: View > Auto-Select.


Note: The default value is unchecked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Ensure that the Auto-Select option is checked.


Result: When the associated check box is checked, the Incoming Alarms are
automatically selected and displayed in the Sublist Content area of the Alarm List.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-11
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Automatically Raise an AS Window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Automatically Raise an AS Window


When to use
Use this task to automatically raise the AS window when alarms in the Sublist Content
area of the Alarm List are updated (raised or cleared).

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault View Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Sublist Counter Area” (p. 2-15)

Before you begin

Task
Complete the following steps to automatically raise the AS window when alarms in the
Sublist Content area of the Alarm List are updated (raised or cleared).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Follow the path: View > Auto-Raise.


Note: The default value is unchecked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Ensure that the Auto-Raise option is checked.


Result: When the associated check box is checked, the AS window is automatically
raised when alarms in the Sublist Content area of the Alarm List are updated (raised
or cleared).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks View Text Multi-Lines

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

View Text Multi-Lines


When to use
Use this task to view the Sublist Content area of the Alarm List using a format of text in
multi-line style.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault View Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Sublist Counter Area” (p. 2-15)

Before you begin

Task
Complete the following steps to view the Sublist Content area of the Alarm List using a
format of text in multi-line style.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Follow the path: View > Text Multi-Lines.


Note: The default value is unchecked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Ensure that the Text Multi-Lines option is checked.


Result: When the associated check box is checked, an alarm in the Sublist Content
area of the Alarm List is displayed in the text multi-line format.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-13
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Show/Hide Alarm List Areas

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show/Hide Alarm List Areas


When to use
Use this task to show or hide areas on the Alarm List. Areas that can be shown or hidden
include the following:
• Sublist Summary
• Sublist Counters
• Sublist Content
• Toolbar
• Message Area

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault View Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault GUI Toolbar” (p. 2-23)
• “Current Fault Sublist Counter Area” (p. 2-15)

Before you begin

Task
Complete the following steps to show or hide areas on the Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Follow one of the paths below:


• View > Sublist Summary Area
• View > Sublist Counters Area
• View > Sublist Content Area
• View > Toolbar
• View > Message Area
Note: The default value for each item above is checked. When the item is checked, it
means that the item is shown in the Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To show a selected area on the Alarm List, ensure that the specific option that you
selected in Step 2 is checked.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-14 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Show/Hide Alarm List Areas

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: When the associated check box is checked, the area selected in Step 2 is
displayed in the Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To hide a selected area on the Alarm List, ensure that the specific option that you selected
in Step 2 is not checked.
Result: When the associated check box is unchecked, the area selected in Step 2 is
hidden in the Alarm List.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-15
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Create an Alarm Sublist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create an Alarm Sublist


When to use
Use this task to create an Alarm Sublist.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault Sublist Menu” (p. 2-20)
• “Current Fault Counter Summary Area” (p. 2-14)
• “Current Fault Counter Summary Contextual Menus” (p. 2-15)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Contextual Menus” (p. 2-17)

Before you begin

Task
Complete the following steps to create an Alarm Sublist.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Counter Summary area of the Alarm List, highlight the type of sublist that you
want to use as a pattern for the new sublist.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Follow the path: Sublist > New.


Result: A Question dialog box is displayed asking you to enter the name of a new
sublist.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter the name of the new sublist in the dialog box.


Note: If you enter a sublist name that is already in existence, an error dialog box
appears.
Result: If a sublist was selected in Step 2, a new sublist is created and it is a copy of
the selected sublist; otherwise, it is a copy of the default sublist.
A Question dialog box is displayed asking you if you want to share the new sublist.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the Yes button to share the new sublist; select the No button if you do not want to
share the new sublist.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-16 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Create an Alarm Sublist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Depending on your selection, the newly-created sublist is either shared or not
shared.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-17
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Modify an Alarm Sublist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modify an Alarm Sublist


When to use
Use this task to modify an Alarm Sublist. This task has multiple parts.
Note: Changes do not need to be made in all an individual tabs.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault Sublist Menu” (p. 2-20)
• “Modify Filter Criteria” (p. 2-20)
• “Modify Filter Operator Criteria ” (p. 2-21)
• “Modify Filter Sort Criteria ” (p. 2-21)
• “Filter List Panel Window” (p. 2-30)
• “Filter Configuration Window” (p. 2-31)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Modifications” (p. 2-17)
• “Current Fault Sublist Menu” (p. 2-20)
• “Sublist Properties Window” (p. 2-33)
• “Current Fault Counter Summary Area” (p. 2-14)
• “Current Fault Counter Summary Contextual Menus” (p. 2-15)
• “Current Fault Sublist Counter Area” (p. 2-15)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Contextual Menus” (p. 2-17)

Before you begin


A Sublist must be selected in the Counter Summary area of the Alarm List.

Task, Part 1 of 6: Access Modify Sublist Window


Complete the following steps to modify an Alarm Sublist.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Counter Summary area of the Alarm List, highlight the type of sublist that you
want to modify.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Follow the path: Sublist > Modify.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-18 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Modify an Alarm Sublist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Modify Window for the type of sublist selected is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Optional. If you want to change the color of the Sublist, click on the color displayed in
the Sublist Color text box.
If you do not want to change the color of the Sublist, go to “Task, Part 2 of 6: Complete
the Display Tab” (p. 3-19).
Note: The Sublist Color can be changed in any of the displayed tabs.
Result: The Color Chooser Window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select one of the tabs available. Options are: Swatches, HSB, or RGB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Make selections in the panel displayed that is based on your selection in Step 5.
Note: You can preview your selections in the Preview sample text located at the
bottom of the window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Validate.
Result: Your color selections are activated and the Color Chooser Window is closed.
You are returned to the Modify Window.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task, Part 2 of 6: Complete the Display Tab


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click the Display tab of the Modify Window.


Result: Hidden and Displayed Attribute columns are shown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Optional. To change the color of Sublist areas, follow the steps in “Task, Part 1 of 6:
Access Modify Sublist Window” (p. 3-18), Step 4 through Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Use the left and right arrow keys to select attributes that are to be hidden or displayed for
the type of Sublist selected.
Result: Attributes listed are moved as per your arrow key selections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Apply.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-19
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Modify an Alarm Sublist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task Part 3 of 6: Complete the Filter Tab
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click the Filter tab of the Modify Window.


Result: Sublist filter options are shown. The Sublist Name is displayed in the Sublist
Name text box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Optional. To change the color of Sublist areas, follow the steps in “Task, Part 1 of 6:
Access Modify Sublist Window” (p. 3-18), Step 4 through Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the Sublist filter by clicking on one of the radio buttons. Options are: Include All
Alarms (No Filter), Include Alarms Matching the Following ..., or Not (Global).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Do one of the following:


• If you selected Include Alarms Matching the Following ... in Step 3, click the Basic
tab and highlight one of the items in the Filter Names table.
• If you selected either Include All Alarms (No Filter) or Not (Global) in Step 3, go to
Step 18.
Result: New, Edit, and Delete buttons are activated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do one of the following:


• If you want to enter a new filter, select the New tab.
• If you want to edit an existing filter, select the Edit tab and go to Step 10.
• If you want to delete an existing filter, select the Delete tab and go to Step 14.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enter a new Filter Name in the Filter Name text box.


Note: An error message is displayed if the new filter name already exists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the Match All Filter Criteria area of the window, do the following. Use the scroll bar
below the Match All Filter Criteria area to view all columns in the table.
• If you want the filter to be removed, click To Be Removed.
• Click Not for negating the rule.
• Select a Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu.
• Select an operator from the Equals drop-down menu.
• Select an Associated Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu to the right of the
operator column.
• Click on the + (plus) sign. Make a selection from the Associated Filter Criteria
pop-up window and click OK.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-20 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Modify an Alarm Sublist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Rule based on your selections in Step 7 appears in the Rule text box.
The Filter description based on your selections in Step 7 appears in the Description of
This Filter text box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Optional. Do one of the following:


• If you want to display more filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the More button.
• If you want to display less filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria table,
click the Fewer button.
• If you want to delete all of the filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the Remove All button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click OK and go to Step 15.


Result: Your changes are made. The New Filter window closes and you are returned
to the Modify Window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 The Filter Name is prepopulated in the Edit Filter window based on your selection in
Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 In the Match All Filter Criteria area of the window, do the following. Use the scroll bar
below the Match All Filter Criteria area to view all columns in the table.
• If you want the filter to be removed, click To Be Removed.
• Click Not for negating the rule.
• Select a Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu.
• Select an operator from the Equals drop-down menu.
• Select an Associated Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu to the right of the
operator column.
• Click on the + (plus) sign. Make a selection from the Associated Filter Criteria
pop-up window and click OK.
Result: The Rule based on your selections in Step 7 appears in the Rule text box.
The Filter description based on your selections in Step 7 appears in the Description of
This Filter text box.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-21
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Modify an Alarm Sublist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Optional. Do one of the following:


• If you want to display more filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the More button.
• If you want to display less filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria table,
click the Fewer button.
• If you want to delete all of the filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the Remove All button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Click OK and go to Step 15.


Result: Your changes are made. The Edit Filter window closes and you are returned to
the Modify Window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Select Yes or No to the Deletion of Filter dialog box question:


Do you really want to remove the filter named <variable>?
Result: If you select Yes, the selected filter is deleted. If you select No, the selected
filter is not deleted. You are returned to the Modify Window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Optional. Do one of the following:


• If you want to add additional filter criteria, click Extended.
• If you do not want to add additional filter criteria, go to Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Click New and complete the New Filter pop-up window following Step 6 through Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Optional. Click the check box for the Not To All field if you do not want your entries to
apply to all filters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task Part 4 of 6: Complete the Sort Tab


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click the Sort tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Optional. To change the color of Sublist areas, follow the steps in “Task, Part 1 of 6:
Access Modify Sublist Window” (p. 3-18), Step 4 through Step 7.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Modify an Alarm Sublist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the Sort Name type from the drop-down menu.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Do one of the following:


• Click Save if you want to sort the Unselected/Selected Sort Criteria table based on
your selection in Step 3.
• Click Remove if you do not want to sort the Unselected/Selected Sort Criteria table
based on your selection in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Use the Left and Right arrow keys to select and de-select Sort Criteria that are displayed.
Result: Sort Criteria names are moved as per your arrow key selections to be
Unselected or Selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select an item in the Selected Sort Criteria column, use the Up and Down arrow keys to
move the selected item one position up or down in the table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task, Part 5 of 6: Complete the Trigger Tab


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click the Trigger tab.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Optional. To change the color of Sublist areas, follow the steps in “Task, Part 1 of 6:
Access Modify Sublist Window” (p. 3-18), Step 4 through Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• Click the Tone On/Off check box to activate a tone for an alarm.
• Unclick the Tone On/Off check box to deactivate a tone for an alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Choose File.


Result: An Open Window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the location of the file to which you want to assign a trigger by navigating through
the file structures presented.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-23
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Modify an Alarm Sublist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Open.
Result: The Open Window closes and the path of the selected file is displayed to the
right of the Choose File button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Do one of the following:


• Click the Blink On/Off check box to activate alarm blinking.
• Unclick the Blink On/Off check box to deactivate alarm blinking.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Do one of the following:


• In the Incoming Alarms Trigger area, click the Enable check box if you want the
alarm triggering to apply to Incoming Alarms.
• In the Incoming Alarms Trigger area, unclick the Enable check box if you do not
want the alarm triggering to apply to Incoming Alarms. Go to Step 14.
Result: The Incoming Alarms drop-down menus become active.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 In the On All Incoming Alarms area, select an item from the drop-down menu. Options
are: On All Incoming Alarms or When Greater Than.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Do one of the following:


• If you selected On All Incoming Alarms in Step 9, go to Step 14.
• If you selected When Greater Than in Step 9, enter a number to signify that alarms
should be triggered above that amount. The default is 0 (zero).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 From the Execute drop-down menu, select one of the options. Options are: Execute or
Navigate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Do one of the following:


• If you selected Execute in Step 11, go to Step 14.
• If you selected Navigate in Step 11, make an additional selection from the drop-down
menu to the right of the text area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Select an item from the Sending drop-down menu.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Modify an Alarm Sublist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Do one of the following:


• In the Outgoing Alarms Trigger area, click the Enable check box if you want the
alarm triggering to apply to Outgoing Alarms.
• In the Outgoing Alarms Trigger area, unclick the Enable check box if you do not want
the alarm triggering to apply to Outgoing Alarms. Go to “Task, Part 6 of 6: Complete
Modify Window Entries” (p. 3-25).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 In the On All Outgoing Alarms area, select an item from the drop-down menu. Options
are: On All Outgoing Alarms or When Less Than.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Do one of the following:


• If you selected On All Outgoing Alarms in Step 15, go to “Task, Part 6 of 6: Complete
Modify Window Entries” (p. 3-25).
• If you selected When Greater Than in Step 15, enter a number to signify that alarms
should be triggered above that amount. The default is 0 (zero).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 From the Execute drop-down menu, select one of the options. Options are: Execute or
Navigate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Do one of the following:


• If you selected Execute in Step 17, go to “Task, Part 6 of 6: Complete Modify
Window Entries” (p. 3-25).
• If you selected Navigate in Step 17, make an additional selection from the drop-down
menu to the right of the text area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Select an item from the Sending drop-down menu.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task, Part 6 of 6: Complete Modify Window Entries


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click Apply.
Result: All entries made in the Modify Window Display, Filter, Sort, and Trigger tabs
are made.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-25
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Activate Alarm Sublist Counters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Activate Alarm Sublist Counters


When to use
Use this task to activate Alarm Sublist Counters.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault Sublist Menu” (p. 2-20)
• “Current Fault Counter Summary Area” (p. 2-14)

Before you begin


This task does not have any preconditions.

Task
Complete the following steps to activate Alarm Sublist Counters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Counter Summary area of the Alarm List, highlight the type of sublist for which
you want counters to be activated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Follow the path: Sublist > Activate.


Result: The counter values of the selected sublist are now activated for all of the
columns to the right of the selected Sublist Name. The counter value appears in the
cell table of the Counter Summary area instead of an “x”.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Deactivate Alarm Sublist Counters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deactivate Alarm Sublist Counters


When to use
Use this task to deactivate Alarm Sublist Counters.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault Sublist Menu” (p. 2-20)
• “Current Fault Counter Summary Area” (p. 2-14)

Before you begin


This task does not have any preconditions.

Task
Complete the following steps to deactivate Alarm Sublist Counters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Counter Summary area of the Alarm List, highlight the type of sublist for which
you want counters to be deactivated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Follow the path: Sublist > Deactivate.


Result: The counter values of the selected sublist are now deactivated for all of the
columns to the right of the selected Sublist Name. An “x” appears in the cell table of
the Counter Summary area instead of a number.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-27
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Delete Alarm Sublists

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Alarm Sublists


When to use
Use this task to delete Alarm Sublists.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault Sublist Menu” (p. 2-20)
• “Current Fault Counter Summary Area” (p. 2-14)

Before you begin


This task does not have any preconditions.

Task
Complete the following steps to delete an Alarm Sublist.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Counter Summary area of the Alarm List, highlight the type of sublist that you
want to delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Follow the path: Sublist > Delete.


Result: The selected sublist type is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-28 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks View More Information About an Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

View More Information About an Alarm


When to use
Use this task to view more information about a selected alarm in the Sublist Content area
of the Alarm List.

Related Information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Secondary Fault Windows” (p. 2-29)
• “More Alarm Information Window” (p. 2-29)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields” (p. 2-16)

Before you begin


An Alarm must exist in the FM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to view more information about a selected alarm in the
Sublist Content area of the Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the alarm for which you want to view more information in the Sublist Content
area of the Alarm List. Multiple selections are allowed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Follow the path: Alarm > More Info....


Result: The More Alarm Info window is displayed with prepopulated data based on
your selection(s) in the Sublist Content area of the Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Optional: If you want to change the order of the alarms in the Working Area at the top of
the window, do one of the following:
• Scroll and click on the alarm
• Use the Up and Down arrow keys
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Highlight an item in the Working Area.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-29
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks View More Information About an Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click on the drop-down menu in the View area and select an attribute item. Options are:
• Identify
• Events
• Diagnosis
• Backup
• Attributes
• Threshold
• Correlation
• State Change
• Additional Information
Result: Depending on your selection, applicable information is displayed in the
Attributes/Values table below.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Notes.
Result: The text box below the Attributes/Values table is enabled. Existing notes are
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Enter a new note or change an existing note.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click Apply Notes.


Result: New notes are added to the item and changes made to existing notes are
updated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 In the External Application To area, select a target application from the drop-down menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Click Navigate to send a navigation message including alarm information.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Click one of the following buttons to complete this task:


• Print
• Export
• Close
• Help
Result: If you selected Print or Export, additional windows are opened for further
input of selected alarms.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-30 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Reserve Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reserve Alarms
When to use
Use this task to reserve alarms to ensure that you are the only one responsible for an
alarm (or a group of alarms).

Related Information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Alarm Menu” (p. 2-22)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)

Before you begin


An Unreserved Alarm (Reservation Status of NRSV) must exist in the FM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to reserve one or several alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the alarm that you want to reserve in the Sublist Content area of the alarm list.
Note: Be sure to highlight an item with a Reservation Status field of NRSV.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• Follow the path: Alarm > Reserve.
• Right-click on the highlighted item and select Reserve from the drop-down menu.
Result: The alarm is reserved and the Reservation Status in the Alarm List changes
from NRSV to RSV.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-31
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Reserve and Assign Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reserve and Assign Alarms


When to use
Use this task to reserve and assign alarms to a selected alarm to ensure that you are the
only one responsible for an alarm (or a group of alarms).

Related Information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Alarm Menu” (p. 2-22)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)

Before you begin


An Unreserved Alarm (Reservation Status of NRSV) must exist in the FM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to reserve and assign one or several alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the alarm that you want to reserve and assign in the Sublist Content area of the
alarm list.
Note: Be sure to highlight an item with a Reservation Status field of NRSV.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• Follow the path: Alarm > Reserve and Assign.
• Right-click on the highlighted item and select Reserve and Assign from the
drop-down menu.
Result: A Question dialog box appears asking if you want to reserve and assign an
alarm(s) to a selected alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK in the dialog box.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-32 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Reserve and Assign Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The alarm is reserved and assigned, and the Reservation Status in the Alarm
List changes from NRSV to RSV.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-33
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Unreserve Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unreserve Alarms
When to use
Use this task to unreserve one or several alarms.

Related Information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Alarm Menu” (p. 2-22)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)

Before you begin


A Reserved alarm (RSV) must exist in the FM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to unreserve one or several alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the alarm(s) that you want to unreserve in the Sublist Content area of the alarm
list.
Note: Be sure to highlight an item with a Reservation Status field of RSV.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• Follow the path: Alarm > Unreserve.
• Right-click on the highlighted item and select Unreserve from the drop-down menu.
Result: The alarm is unreserved and the Reservation Status in the Alarm List changes
from RSV to NRSV.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-34 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Trouble Ticket Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Trouble Ticket Alarms


When to use
Use this task to enter a Trouble Ticket for a selected alarm(s).

Related Information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Alarm Menu” (p. 2-22)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)

Before you begin


An alarm must exist in the FM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to enter a Trouble Ticket for a selected alarm(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the alarm(s) for which you want to enter a Trouble Ticket in the Sublist Content
area of the alarm list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• Follow the path: Alarm > Trouble Ticket.
• Right-click on the highlighted item and select Trouble Ticket from the drop-down
menu.
Result: A Question dialog box appears asking if you want to Trouble Ticket the
selected alarm(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK in the dialog box.


Result: A Trouble Ticket is entered for the alarm(s) selected.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-35
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Acknowledge Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Acknowledge Alarms
When to use
Use this task to acknowledge an alarm(s).
By acknowledging a single alarm, or a group of selected alarms, in the Alarm Sublist
Content window, the user notifies the system that the alarms are being taking them into
account.

Related Information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Alarm Menu” (p. 2-22)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)

Before you begin


Unacknowledged alarms (NACK) must exist in the FM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to acknowledge one or several alarm(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the alarm(s) that you want to acknowledge in the Sublist Content area of the
alarm list.
Note: Be sure to highlight an item with a Acknowledgement Status field of NACK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• Follow the path: Alarm > Acknowledge.
• Right-click on the highlighted item and select Acknowledge from the drop-down
menu.
Result: The alarm is acknowledged and the Acknowledgement Status in the Alarm
List changes from NACK to ACK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-36 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Unacknowledge Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unacknowledge Alarms
When to use
Use this task to unacknowledge an alarm(s).

Related Information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Alarm Menu” (p. 2-22)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)

Before you begin


An Acknowledged alarm (ACK) must exist in the FM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to unacknowledge one or several alarm(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the alarm(s) that you want to unacknowledge in the Sublist Content area of the
alarm list.
Note: Be sure to highlight an item with a Acknowledgement Status field of ACK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• Follow the path: Alarm > Unacknowledge.
• Right-click on the highlighted item and select Unacknowledge from the drop-down
menu.
Result: The alarm is unacknowledged and the Acknowledgement Status in the Alarm
List changes from ACK to NACK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-37
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Manually Purge an Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Manually Purge an Alarm


When to use
Use this task to purge one or several alarm(s) manually.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Alarm Menu” (p. 2-22)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)

Before you begin


An alarm must exist in the FM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to manually purge one or several alarm(s):
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the alarm(s) that you want to purge in the Sublist Content area of the alarm list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• Follow the path: Alarm > Manual Purge.
• Right-click on the highlighted item and select Manual Purge from the drop-down
menu.
Result: A Question dialog box appears asking if you want to manually purge the
selected alarm(s) to an archive file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK in the dialog box.


Result: The purged alarm(s) disappears from the Alarm sublist, or the main list, and is
archived if the purged alarm matches the archiving filter.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-38 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Manually Clear an Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Manually Clear an Alarm


When to use
Use this task to clear one or several alarm(s) manually.
When Alarm Clear Event is not received from an alarm agent, an FM user can manually
clear this kind of alarm. FM can be informed about this kind of alarm either by the alarm
agent or by the FM off–line configuration.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Clear Alarm” (p. 2-8)
• “Current Alarm Management” (p. 2-7)
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Alarm Menu” (p. 2-22)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area Fields” (p. 2-16)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)

Before you begin


An alarm must exist in the FM component with a status that is able to be cleared.

Task
Complete the following steps to manually clear one or several alarm(s) from the Alarm
Sublist window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the alarm(s) that you want to clear in the Sublist Content area of the alarm list.
Note: The alarm status must be Clearable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• Follow the path: Alarm > Manual Clear.
• Right-click on the highlighted item and select Manual Clear from the drop-down
menu.
Result: A Question dialog box appears asking if you want to manually clear the
selected alarm(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK in the dialog box.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-39
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Manually Clear an Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The selected alarm is cleared.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-40 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Export Output of an Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Export Output of an Alarm


When to use
Use this task to export the contents of a single alarm or the contents of an alarm sublist to
a file. The Output dialog box must be completed with the required parameters.
Note: The exported information concerns only the attributes displayed in the sublist.
The user can change the default options of the report output, exporting the alarms to an
ASCII file or using a specific print command.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault File Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)
• “Export Management Window” (p. 2-46)

Before you begin


An Alarm must exist in the FM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to export a part or the whole Alarm Sublist.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Sublist Content area of the Alarm List, highlight one or several alarm(s) for which
you want to export alarm output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• Follow the path: File > Export.
• Right-click on the highlighted item and select Export from the drop-down menu.
Result: The Export Management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the Selected Alarms field in the Alarms Sources area.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-41
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Export Output of an Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select one of the following in the XSLT File Source area:


• Use Default
• Displayed Attributes
• Other XSLT File - If this option is selected, click on the Choose File button in the
XSLT File area and select the appropriate item.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Do one of the following:


• Enter in the name of the file to be exported in the area provided under the Export File
Destination field name. Go to Step 9.
• Click the Choose File button.
Result: The Choose File (Save) dialog box opens and allows you to browse existing
files for selection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Do one of the following:


• Select a file from the list.
• Enter a file name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click the Save button.


Result: The dialog box is closed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 In the Export Management window, click Apply.


Result: Alarm information selected is exported to the file destination entered.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-42 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Print Output of an Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Print Output of an Alarm


When to use
Use this task to send the contents of an alarm report to a printer. The Output dialog box
must be completed with the required parameters.
Note: The exported information concerns only the attributes displayed in the sublist.
The user can change the default options, exporting the alarms to an ASCII file or using a
specific print command.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault File Menu” (p. 2-19)
• “Current Fault Sublist Content Area” (p. 2-16)
• “Print Management Window” (p. 2-46)

Before you begin


An Alarm must exist in the FM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to export a part or the whole Alarm Sublist.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Sublist Content area of the Alarm List, highlight one or several alarm(s) for which
you want to print alarm output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• Follow the path: File > Print.
• Right-click on the highlighted item and select Print from the drop-down menu.
Result: The Print Management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the Selected Alarms field in the Alarms Sources area.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-43
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Print Output of an Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select one of the following in the XSLT File Source area:


• Use Default and go to Step 8.
• Displayed Attributes and go to Step 8.
• Other XSLT File - If this option is selected, click on the Choose File button in the
XSLT File area and select the appropriate item.
Result: The Choose File (Save) dialog box opens and allows you to browse existing
files for selection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Do one of the following:


• Select a file from the list.
• Enter a file name.
• Develop a print command that handles as a parameter the name of the temporary
formatted file generated by AS. This file is not accessible and the FM component
should execute the user command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click the Save button.


Result: The dialog box is closed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 In the Print Management window, click Apply.


Result: Alarm information selected is printed to the file destination entered.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-44 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Administer Alarm Sources


When to use
Use this task to administer Alarm Sources. This task is presented in multiple parts, which
are based on the primary tab selections on the FM Current IM Administration window.
Tabs in this window are:
• CAL (Current Alarm List) Administration
• Archiving Filter
• Auto Purge
• Auto - TT
• Auto ACK
• Trigger
• Severity Change
In addition to the tabs noted above, several of the tabs also have sub-tabs that allow the
user to enter additional information.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Administration Fault Windows” (p. 2-37)
• “Current Alarm List (CAL) Administration Tabbed Pane” (p. 2-38)
• “Archive Filter, Auto Purge, Auto TT, and Auto Ack Tabbed Panes” (p. 2-39)
• “Aging Configuration Window” (p. 2-40)
• “General Administration FM Information” (p. 2-37)
• “Trigger List Tabbed Pane” (p. 2-41)
• “Severity Change List Tabbed Pane” (p. 2-44)
• “Current Fault Alarm Sources Menu” (p. 2-23)

Before you begin

Task, Part 1 of 8: Access the Administration IM Main Window


Complete the following steps to administer Alarm Sources.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Follow the path: Alarm Source > Administration > IM <variable>.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-45
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The FM Current IM Administration window opens to the CAL Administration
Tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task, Part 2 of 8: Complete the CAL Administration Tab


Complete the following steps to complete the CAL Tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on the CAL Administration Tab.


Result: The CAL Administration Tab pane opens. This pane is divided into three
parts: Overflow, Purging Sort Criteria, and Statistics.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Overflow area, enter the CAL Maximum Size for Alarms. The default is 10000
Alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Overflow area, enter the Warning Filling %. The default is 80%.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Overflow area, select the Overflow Action Mode. Options are: WRAP or HALT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Overflow area, enter the Overflow Purge Size for Alarms. The default is 100
Alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Purging Sort Criteria area, use the left and right arrow keys to move items listed
between the Unselected Criteria column and the Selected Criteria column to meet your
requirements. Selection of these attributes allows you to choose the attributes used for
sorting the purge of the alarms of the concerning IM CAL.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the Statistics area, review the four read-only parameter information boxes. These
parameters are displayed to warn about the IM status. Parameters displayed are: CAL Size,
CAL Status, CAL Filling Percentage, and ARS Connection Status.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Apply.
Result: All entries made in the CAL Administration Tab pane are applied.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-46 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task, Part 3 of 8: Complete the Archiving Filter Tab
Complete the following steps to complete the Archiving Filter Tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on the Archiving Filter Tab.


Result: The Archiving Filter Tab pane opens. This pane is divided into four parts:
Select Automatic Archive Options, Personal Filter Definition, Description, and Filter
General Rule.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Select Automatic Archive Options area, select one of the following radio buttons:
• No Archive (When selected, a Match None filter is applied on the Archive action.)
• Archive All (When selected, a Match all filter is applied on the Archive action.)
• Current Filter Applied on AS Current IM (This option appears only when there is a
filter already applied on the alarm source and not defined in the User filter repository.
This option is accompanied by a read-only text field to display the filter rule applied
on the alarm source.)
• Set a Personal Filter (When selected, this option enables the filter tabbed panes and
allows the user to select the active filter from the list of available filters.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• If you selected No Archive, Archive All, or Current Filter Applied on AS Current IM
in Step 2, go to Step 10.
• If you selected Set a Personal Filter in Step 2, click Not (Global) if you do not want
the Personal Filter to apply globally.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the New tab.


Result: The New Filter pop-up window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter a new Filter Name in the Filter Name text box.


Note: An error message is displayed if the new filter name already exists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Match All Filter Criteria area of the window, do the following. Use the scroll bar
below the Match All Filter Criteria area to view all columns in the table.
• If you want the filter to be removed, click To Be Removed.
• Click Not to negate the rule.
• Select a Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu.
• Select an operator from the Equals drop-down menu.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-47
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Select an Associated Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu to the right of the
operator column.
• Click on the + (plus) sign. Make a selection from the Associated Filter Criteria
pop-up window and click OK.
Result: The Rule based on your selections in Step 6 appears in the Rule text box.
The Filter description based on your selections in Step 6 appears in the Description of
This Filter text box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Optional. Do one of the following:


• If you want to display more filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the More button.
• If you want to display less filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria table,
click the Fewer button.
• If you want to delete all of the filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the Remove All button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click OK.
Result: Your changes are made. The New Filter window closes and you are returned
to the Archiving Filter Tab. The Description and Filter General Rule text boxes are
populated based on your selections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Optional. Click the Extended Tab and select several active filters from the list of
available filters in the User Extended filter repository. This tabbed pane is visible only
when the Extended Attributes are defined (on the server side).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click Apply.
Result: All entries made in the Archiving Filter Tab pane are applied.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task, Part 4 of 8: Complete the Auto Purge Tab


Complete the following steps to complete the Auto Purge Tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on the Auto Purge Tab.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-48 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Auto Purge Tab pane opens. This pane is divided into four parts: Select
Automatic Purge Options, Personal Filter Definition, Description, and Filter General
Rule.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Select Automatic Purge Options area, select one of the following radio buttons:
• No Archive (When selected, a Match None filter is applied on the Purge action.)
• Archive All (When selected, a Match all filter is applied on the Purge action.)
• Current Filter Applied on AS Current IM (This option appears only when there is a
filter already applied on the alarm source and not defined in the User filter repository.
This option is accompanied by a read-only text field to display the filter rule applied
on the alarm source.)
• Set a Personal Filter (When selected, this option enables the filter tabbed panes and
allows the user to select the active filter from the list of available filters.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• If you selected No Archive, Archive All, or Current Filter Applied on AS Current IM
in Step 2, go to Step 10.
• If you selected Set a Personal Filter in Step 2, click Not (Global) if you do not want
the Personal Filter to apply globally.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the New tab.


Result: The New Filter pop-up window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter a new Filter Name in the Filter Name text box.


Note: An error message is displayed if the new filter name already exists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Match All Filter Criteria area of the window, do the following. Use the scroll bar
below the Match All Filter Criteria area to view all columns in the table.
• If you want the filter to be removed, click To Be Removed.
• Click Not to negate the rule.
• Select a Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu.
• Select an operator from the Equals drop-down menu.
• Select an Associated Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu to the right of the
operator column.
• Click on the + (plus) sign. Make a selection from the Associated Filter Criteria
pop-up window and click OK.
Result: The Rule based on your selections in Step 6 appears in the Rule text box.
The Filter description based on your selections in Step 6 appears in the Description of
This Filter text box.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-49
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Optional. Do one of the following:


• If you want to display more filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the More button.
• If you want to display less filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria table,
click the Fewer button.
• If you want to delete all of the filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the Remove All button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click OK.
Result: Your changes are made. The New Filter window closes and you are returned
to the Auto Purge Tab. The Description and Filter General Rule text boxes are
populated based on your selections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Optional. Click the Extended Tab and select several active filters from the list of
available filters in the User Extended filter repository. This tabbed pane is visible only
when the Extended Attributes are defined (on the server side).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click Apply.
Result: All entries made in the Auto Purge Tab pane are applied.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task, Part 5 of 8: Complete the Auto ACK Tab


Complete the following steps to complete the Auto ACK Tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on the Auto ACK Tab.


Result: The Auto ACK Tab pane opens. This pane is divided into four parts: Select
Automatic Acknowledgement Options, Personal Filter Definition, Description, and
Filter General Rule.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Select Automatic Purge Options area, select one of the following radio buttons:
• No Acknowledge (When selected, a Match None filter is applied on the
Acknowledgement action.)
• Acknowledge All (When selected, a Match all filter is applied on the
Acknowledgement action.)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-50 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Current Filter Applied on AS Current IM (This option appears only when there is a
filter already applied on the alarm source and not defined in the User filter repository.
This option is accompanied by a read-only text field to display the filter rule applied
on the alarm source.)
• Set a Personal Filter (When selected, this option enables the filter tabbed panes and
allows the user to select the active filter from the list of available filters.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• If you selected No Archive, Archive All, or Current Filter Applied on AS Current IM
in Step 2, go to Step 10.
• If you selected Set a Personal Filter in Step 2, click Not (Global) if you do not want
the Personal Filter to apply globally.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the New tab.


Result: The New Filter pop-up window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter a new Filter Name in the Filter Name text box.


Note: An error message is displayed if the new filter name already exists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Match All Filter Criteria area of the window, do the following. Use the scroll bar
below the Match All Filter Criteria area to view all columns in the table.
• If you want the filter to be removed, click To Be Removed.
• Click Not to negate the rule.
• Select a Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu.
• Select an operator from the Equals from the drop-down menu.
• Select an Associated Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu to the right of the
operator column.
• Click on the + (plus) sign. Make a selection from the Associated Filter Criteria
pop-up window and click OK.
Result: The Rule based on your selections in Step 6 appears in the Rule text box.
The Filter description based on your selections in Step 6 appears in the Description of
This Filter text box.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-51
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Optional. Do one of the following:


• If you want to display more filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the More button.
• If you want to display less filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria table,
click the Fewer button.
• If you want to delete all of the filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the Remove All button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click OK.
Result: Your changes are made. The New Filter window closes and you are returned
to the Auto ACK Tab. The Description and Filter General Rule text boxes are
populated based on your selections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Optional. Click the Extended Tab and select several active filters from the list of
available filters in the User Extended filter repository. This tabbed pane is visible only
when the Extended Attributes are defined (on the server side).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click Apply.
Result: All entries made in the Auto ACK Tab pane are applied.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task, Part 6 of 8: Complete the Aging Tab


Complete the following steps to complete the Aging Tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on the Aging Tab and open New.


Result: The Aging Tab pane opens. There are two additional tabs on the Aging Tab:
Definition Tab and Filter Tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Definition Tab.


Result: The Definition Tab window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Alarm Aging Name area, enter the Alarm Aging Name in the text box provided.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-52 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the On Alarm area, do one or more of the following. Multiple selections can be made.
• Click the Present check box, and enter the number of Minutes in the text box
provided.
• Click the Acknowledge Status check box, select a status from the drop-down menu,
and enter the number of Minutes in the text box provided. Status options are: Ack or
NAck.
• Click the Clearing Status check box, select a status from the drop-down menu, and
enter the number of Minutes in the text box provided. Status options are: Cleared or
Not Cleared.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Do area, click the check box for all that apply. Options are:
• Acknowledge
• Purge
• Manual Clear
• Create TT
• Expire
• Trigger
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Do area, select an option from the drop-down menu. Options are: Execute or
Navigate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the Every area, enter the number of minutes to set the frequency of the automatic
actions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Apply.
Result: All entries made in the Aging Definition Tab pane are applied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Select the Filter Tab.


Result: The Filter Tab window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 In the Select Automatic Filter Option area, select one of the following:
• Match None
• Match All
• Set a Personal Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-53
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Do one of the following:


• If you selected Match None or Match All in Step 10, go to Step 18.
• If you selected Set a Personal Filter in Step 2, click Not (Global) if you do not want
the Personal Filter to apply globally.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Click the New tab.


Result: The New Filter pop-up window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Enter a new Filter Name in the Filter Name text box.


Note: An error message is displayed if the new filter name already exists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 In the Match All Filter Criteria area of the window, do the following. Use the scroll bar
below the Match All Filter Criteria area to view all columns in the table.
• If you want the filter to be removed, click To Be Removed.
• Click Not to negate the rule.
• Select a Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu.
• Select an operator from the Equals from the drop-down menu.
• Select an Associated Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu to the right of the
operator column.
• Click on the + (plus) sign. Make a selection from the Associated Filter Criteria
pop-up window and click OK.
Result: The Rule based on your selections in Step 14 appears in the Rule text box.
The Filter description based on your selections in Step 14 appears in the Description
of This Filter text box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Optional. Do one of the following:


• If you want to display more filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the More button.
• If you want to display less filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria table,
click the Fewer button.
• If you want to delete all of the filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the Remove All button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Click OK.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-54 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Your changes are made. The New Filter window closes and you are returned
to the Aging Tab. The Description and Filter General Rule text boxes are populated
based on your selections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Optional. Click the Extended Tab and select several active filters from the list of
available filters in the User Extended filter repository. This tabbed pane is visible only
when the Extended Attributes are defined (on the server side).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Click Apply.
Result: All entries made in the Aging Filter Tab pane are applied.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task, Part 7 of 8: Complete the Trigger Tab


Complete the following steps to complete the Trigger Tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on the Trigger Tab.


Result: The Create Trigger Tab pane opens. There are three additional tabs on the
Create Trigger Tab: Definition Tab, Filter Tab, and Mail/SMS Tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Definition Tab.


Result: The Definition Tab window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Alarm Trigger Name area, enter the Alarm Trigger Name in the text box provided.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Incoming Alarms Trigger area, do one or more of the following. Multiple selections
can be made.
• Click the Enable check box to enable the trigger.
• Click the On All Incoming Alarms drop-down menu, and select On All Incoming
Alarms or When Greater Than. If you select When Greater Than, an Alarms text
box appears for you to enter a number; the default is 0 (zero).
• Click the Execute drop-down menu, and select Execute, Navigate, or Send
Mail/SMS. If you select Navigate, make additional selections from the drop-down
menu to the right of the Execute drop-down menu, and then click the No Alarm
Attribute drop-down menu, and select No Alarm Attribute or All Alarm Attributes.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-55
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: If you select Send Mail/SMS, the Mail/SMS tab is activated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Outgoing Alarms Trigger area, do one or more of the following. Multiple selections
can be made.
• Click the Enable check box to enable the trigger.
• Click the On All Outgoing Alarms drop-down menu, and select On All Outgoing
Alarms or When Less Than. If you select When Less Than, an Alarms text box
appears for you to enter a number; the default is 0 (zero).
• Click the Execute drop-down menu, and select Execute or Navigate. If you select
Navigate, make additional selections from the drop-down menu to the right of the
Execute drop-down menu, and then click the No Alarm Attribute drop-down menu,
and select No Alarm Attribute or All Alarm Attributes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Apply.
Result: All entries made in the Create Trigger Definition Tab pane are applied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select the Filter Tab.


Result: The Filter Tab window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 In the Select Automatic Filter Option area, select one of the following:
• Match None
• Match All
• Set a Personal Filter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Do one of the following:


• If you selected Match None or Match All in Step 8, go to Step 28.
• If you selected Set a Personal Filter in Step 8, click Not (Global) if you do not want
the Personal Filter to apply globally.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click the New tab.


Result: The New Filter pop-up window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Enter a new Filter Name in the Filter Name text box.


Note: An error message is displayed if the new filter name already exists.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-56 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 In the Match All Filter Criteria area of the window, do the following. Use the scroll bar
below the Match All Filter Criteria area to view all columns in the table.
• If you want the filter to be removed, click To Be Removed.
• Click Not to negate the rule.
• Select a Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu.
• Select an operator from the Equals from the drop-down menu.
• Select an Associated Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu to the right of the
operator column.
• Click on the + (plus) sign. Make a selection from the Associated Filter Criteria
pop-up window and click OK.
Result: The Rule based on your selections in Step 12 appears in the Rule text box.
The Filter description based on your selections in Step 12 appears in the Description
of This Filter text box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Optional. Do one of the following:


• If you want to display more filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the More button.
• If you want to display less filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria table,
click the Fewer button.
• If you want to delete all of the filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the Remove All button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Click OK.
Result: Your changes are made. The New Filter window closes and you are returned
to the Aging Tab. The Description and Filter General Rule text boxes are populated
based on your selections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Optional. Click the Extended Tab and select several active filters from the list of
available filters in the User Extended filter repository. This tabbed pane is visible only
when the Extended Attributes are defined (on the server side).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Select the Mail/SMS Tab.


Result: The Create Trigger Mail/SMS Tab window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Click the check box for Mail or SMS. Multiple selections are allowed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Enter appropriate text in the Message Subject text box.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-57
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Click Edit in the Message Header area.


Note: If you already have a Message Header entered, you can click Delete to delete
that Message Header.
Result: A text box opens where you can enter text in a free style format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Enter Message Header text and click Save.


Result: The Message Header text is saved, the text box is closed, and you are returned
to the Mail/SMS tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 In the Mail Addresses List area, click New.


Result: The area below the New button allows you to enter information such as:
Activation State, Name, and Email.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Optional. Do one of the following:


• If you want to add more rows to the Mail Addresses List, click New again.
• If you want to edit an existing Mail Addresses List, click Edit.
• If you want to delete an existing Mail Addresses List, click Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 In the Phone Numbers List area, click New.


Result: The area below the New button allows you to enter information such as:
Activation State, Name, and Phone.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Optional. Do one of the following:


• If you want to add more rows to the Phone Numbers List, click New again.
• If you want to edit an existing Phone Numbers List, click Edit.
• If you want to delete an existing Phone Numbers List, click Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 In the Alarm Attributes area, use the arrow keys to move Attributes between the
Excluded Attributes column and the Included Attributes column.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Click Edit in the Message Footer area.


Note: If you already have a Message Footer entered, you can click Delete to delete
that Message Footer.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-58 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A text box opens where you can enter text in a free style format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Enter Message Footer text and click Save.


Result: The Message Footer text is saved, the text box is closed, and you are returned
to the Mail/SMS tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Click Apply.
Result: All entries made in the Trigger Tab panes are made.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task, Part 8 of 8: Complete the Severity Change Tab


Complete the following steps to complete the Severity Change Tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on the Severity Change Tab and open New.


Result: The Create Alarm Severity Change Tab pane opens. There are two additional
tabs on the Create Alarm Severity Change Tab: Definition Tab and Filter Tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Definition Tab.


Result: The Definition Tab window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Alarm Severity Change Name area, enter the Alarm Severity Change Name in the
text box provided.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the On Alarm area, click the Severity Change checkbox.


Result: The drop-down menu to the right of the Severity Change checkbox is
activated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select one of the following options:


• Critical
• Major
• Minor
• Warning
• Indeterminate
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Apply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-59
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: All entries made in the Create Alarm Severity Change Definition Tab pane are
applied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select the Filter Tab.


Result: The Filter Tab window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 In the Select Automatic Filter Option area, select one of the following:
• Match None
• Match All
• Set a Personal Filter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Do one of the following:


• If you selected Match None or Match All in Step 8, go to Step 16.
• If you selected Set a Personal Filter in Step 8, click Not (Global) if you do not want
the Personal Filter to apply globally.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click the New tab.


Result: The New Filter pop-up window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Enter a new Filter Name in the Filter Name text box.


Note: An error message is displayed if the new filter name already exists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 In the Match All Filter Criteria area of the window, do the following. Use the scroll bar
below the Match All Filter Criteria area to view all columns in the table.
• If you want the filter to be removed, click To Be Removed.
• Click Not to negate the rule.
• Select a Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu.
• Select an operator from the Equals drop-down menu.
• Select an Associated Filter Criteria from the drop-down menu to the right of the
operator column.
• Click on the + (plus) sign. Make a selection from the Associated Filter Criteria
pop-up window and click OK.
Result: The Rule based on your selections in Step 12 appears in the Rule text box.
The Filter description based on your selections in Step 12 appears in the Description
of This Filter text box.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-60 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Administer Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Optional. Do one of the following:


• If you want to display more filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the More button.
• If you want to display less filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria table,
click the Fewer button.
• If you want to delete all of the filter criteria options in the Match All Filter Criteria
table, click the Remove All button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Click OK.
Result: Your changes are made. The New Filter window closes and you are returned
to the Filter Tab. The Description and Filter General Rule text boxes are populated
based on your selections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Optional. Click the Extended Tab and select several active filters from the list of
available filters in the User Extended filter repository. This tabbed pane is visible only
when the Extended Attributes are defined (on the server side).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Click Apply.
Result: All entries made in the Severity Change Tab panes are made.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-61
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Synchronize Alarm Sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Synchronize Alarm Sources


When to use
Use this task to synchronize Alarm Sources.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Current Fault GUI” (p. 2-13)
• “Current Fault Alarm Sources Menu” (p. 2-23)

Before you begin


Alarms must exist in the FM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to synchronize Alarm Sources.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS FM Component for Current Alarms” (p. 3-3).
Result: The Fault Management component main window is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Follow the path: Alarm Sources > Synchronization.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select one of the options from the drop-down menu.


Result: Alarm Sources selected are synchronized.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-62 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Manage Alarm Debouncing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Manage Alarm Debouncing


When to use
Use this task for alarm debouncing management.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Alarm Debouncing” (p. 2-12)
• “Problem Types” (p. 2-10)
• “Probable Causes” (p. 2-10)

Before you begin

Task
Complete the following steps for alarm debouncing management.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 The Alarm Debouncing parameters of an EMLIM can be configured during the 1350
OMS EML system configuration. During system configuration, if the user double-clicks
the EMLIM, the Parameters Definition window is displayed. The Alarm Debounce
parameters can be modified from their default values, and then applied using the window.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 3-63
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Fault Management Tasks Manage Alarm Debouncing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-64 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Part II: Performance Monitoring

Overview
Purpose
This part describes the Performance Monitoring application inside the 1350 OMS
product.

Contents

Chapter 4, CPM Process Variables 4-1


Chapter 5, Performance Monitoring Concepts 5-1
Chapter 6, Performance Monitoring Tasks 6-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS II-1
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
II-2 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
4 CPM Process Variables
4

Overview
Purpose
Performance Monitoring (PM) concepts and functionalities discussed in this chapter
pertain to common Performance Monitoring features across the 1350 OMS. Performance
Monitoring concepts that are application-specific are discussed in the applicable
application documents.
In this chapter the CPM environment variables are described to correctly configure the
application.

Contents

CPM process variables setting 4-2


CPM process Environment Variables 4-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 4-1
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
CPM Process Variables Overview
CPM process variables setting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CPM process variables setting

CPM process Environment Variables


SENIM data file collection time-out
Meaningful for IM configuration only.
Relevant Process: pmCollMng (pmMng)
In order to customize the time-out between two different file collection operations the
following options can be inserted in the process starting command:
/usr/Systems/SDH_<nms_instance>/bin/pmCollMng -timeout15m <n>
where timeout15m <n> allows to customize the time-out value representing the collection
frequency of the 15 minutes transfer files from the EMLs to SDH. The value<n> must be
expressed in minutes and it must be included between 15 (i.e. a quarter) and 225 (i.e. 3
hours and 45 minutes). If the value<n> is not specified the default value is 15 minutes;
/usr/Systems/SDH_<nms_instance>/bin/pmCollMng -timeoutday <n>
where timeoutday <n> allows to customize the time-out value representing the collection
frequency of the 24 hours transfer files from the EMLs to SDH. The collection activity
has anyway a built-in time-out of 4 hours after midnight to collect data file relevant for
the last elapsed day. The value <n>must be expressed in minutes and it must be included
between 1440 (i.e. one day) and 8640 (i.e. six days). If the value <n> is not specified the
default value is 1440.

SENIM data file collection time-out


Meaningful for IM configuration only.
Relevant Process: pmCollMng (pmMng)
In order to customize the time-out between two different file collection operations the
following options can be inserted in the process starting command:
/usr/Systems/SDH_<nms_instance>/bin/pmCollMng -timeout15m <n>
where timeout15m <n> allows to customize the time-out value representing the collection
frequency of the 15 minutes transfer files from the EMLs to SDH. The value<n> must be
expressed in minutes and it must be included between 15 (i.e. a quarter) and 225 (i.e. 3
hours and 45 minutes). If the value<n> is not specified the default value is 15 minutes;
/usr/Systems/SDH_<nms_instance>/bin/pmCollMng -timeoutday <n>
where timeoutday <n> allows to customize the time-out value representing the collection
frequency of the 24 hours transfer files from the EMLs to SDH. The collection activity
has anyway a built-in time-out of 4 hours after midnight to collect data file relevant for

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
CPM Process Variables CPM process Environment Variables
CPM process variables setting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the last elapsed day. The value <n>must be expressed in minutes and it must be included
between 1440 (i.e. one day) and 8640 (i.e. six days). If the value <n> is not specified the
default value is 1440.

TSD data file collection time-out


Meaningful for IM configuration only.
Relevant Process: tsdFepColl
T-FEPCOLL acts on a periodic basis: the collection frequency could be provisioned from
an user by means of a configuration file COLL_CFG.
In COLL_CFG file the user can specify:
• the granularity (e.g. G 24 24 hours granularity, G 15 15 minutes granularity)
• a granularity list indicating the day partition and the collection frequency
(e.g. 12 60, a copy from EML is done every 60 minutes for the period starting from the
previous period end, till 12 A.M)
The configuration file COLL_CFG must be present in the directory specified by the
environment variable PM_DATA_WORK.. It is in charge of the user to provide the
COLL_CFG file.
When the file COLL_CFG is not present a default value is adopted from the tsdFepColl
agent:
• G 24: frequency one hour
• G 15: frequency 15 minutes

SENIM Maximum number of data collection processes


Meaningful for IM configuration only.
Relevant Process: pmCollMng
To define the maximum number of parallel collection activity that can be executed the
following option can be inserted in the process starting command:
/usr/Systems/SDH_<nms_instance>/bin/pmCollMng - maxscript <n>
the value <n> represents the maximum number of scripts that can be execute in parallel to
collect the PM transfer files from the EMLs. If it is not specified the default value is 3.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 4-3
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
CPM Process Variables CPM process Environment Variables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
5 5erformance Monitoring
P
Concepts

Overview
Purpose
Performance Monitoring concepts and functionalities discussed in this chapter pertain to
Converged Performance Monitoring (CPM) features that are common across the 1350
OMS product set. Performance Monitoring concepts that are application-specific are
discussed in the applicable component documents.
For Converged Performance Monitoring (CPM) tasks, see Chapter 6, “Performance
Monitoring Tasks”.

Contents

PM Overview 5-2
PM Architectural Overview 5-4
PM Report Analysis 5-14
Selective PM 5-14
Search Functions 5-15
Action Functions 5-16
TP Values 5-16
NML Measure Management 5-17
NML Transport Management 5-17
NML TP Management 5-18
NML TCA Management 5-18
NML Audit Management 5-18
NML Report Profile Management 5-19
Report Generation Concepts 5-19
Tabular Reports 5-20
Line Chart Reports 5-21
Bar Chart Reports 5-22

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-1
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Database Administration through the Performance Monitoring Component 5-23

PM Overview
Performance Monitoring (PM) Description
Performance Monitoring facilitates the planning and implementation of proactive,
forward-looking network maintenance strategies by providing a centralized facility to
monitor network performance systematically, which is accomplished by non-intrusively
gathering in-service information about the state of the managed NEs.
The generic common component used to manage Performance Monitoring issues for all
components included in the 1350 OMS product set is referred to as Converged
Performance Monitoring (CPM).
The aim of the Performance Monitoring at SDH side is to allow the user to monitor
transport objects, i.e. the objects path and trail. The monitoring activity is executed on the
involved tps.
In order to monitor transport objects, the user creates objects called " Measures ", which
are performance monitoring work sessions, defined by a set of characteristics according
to the Customer's needs.
After creating the measure, the user must associate (correlate) to it the transport/s to
monitor and the termination points (TPs).
The status of the measure can be:
• Planned. This means that the measure has been defined.
• Active. This means that the collection activity is working.
• Stopped. This means that the collection activity is terminated. The collection activity
can restart upon entering the Activate command.
To activate a measure on paths/trails, the following conditions are mandatory:
• the path/trail working state = normal
• the path configuration state = implemented or commissioned
• the trail configuration state = configured at LO
Note: Only one measure can be active at the same time on a PM termination point for
a given granularity value ( 15 min, 24 h )
Note: For a path terminated to all virtual objects, the relevant tps cannot be
automatically correlated.
In the following paragraphs it is given a description of the main procedures relevant to
PM.
Note: TCA handling on 24 Hours Measurements
This feature allows the definition of TCA profiles on 24h unidirectional measurements.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user is able to correlate a TCA to 24h measurements. For new NEs, the Maintenance
measurement should to be used but, for compatibility, also the QoS measurement is
accepted.

Performance Monitoring Functionalities


This section describes the functionalities of the Performance Monitoring (PM)
component, which offers a graphical user interface (GUI) to generate different types of
PM reports.
Performance management includes the storage of historical performance data of managed
Network Elements, reporting of the stored performance data, and long-term trend analysis
of the stored performance data.
The system administrator can request the PM application to perform database
management actions like backup/restore, data purge, database optimization, database
cleanup, and database size monitoring.

Performance Monitoring Collection Timeframes


Performance Monitoring provides the following collection timeframe functionalities
related to management of performance data collected by each NE:
• Start and Stop PM on a specific TP (Termination Point)
The following different granularity measurement types may be started:
– Every 15 minutes
– One hour
– One day
– One week
– One month
– One year

Performance Monitoring Access


The Performance Monitoring component can be accessed from Web desktop (portal
window) by following the path: Search > PM or Action > PM.
If the user selected the Search option in the path, the following submenus are available
from which to make additional selections:
• PM Domains on EML
• PM Domains on NML
• DB Administration - Submenus include Archive Rules Setup and Archive Session
Management.
If the user selected the Action option in the path, the following submenu is available:
• Set Report Options

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-3
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Architectural Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PM Architectural Overview
PM Architecture
The 1350 OMS CPM is divided into three main functional subsystems, as follows:
• CPM GUI Server
• CPM NML
• CPM EML
CPM GUI Server
In 1350 OMS, the MS-GUI includes specificities related to each component in a GUI
layer, referred to as the GUI Server. The CPM component includes all of the PM data in
the CPM GUI Server. Through rendering, the information made available by the MS-GUI
can be commonly used by all applications.
CPM NML
CPM provides a specific add-on to Connectivity Managers through a CPM NML plug-in.
The CPM NML can be plugged inside each Technological Network Manager in order to
cover PM management for Termination Points associated to Connectivities. The CPM
NML can be separately plugged inside the following Network Management Systems
(Connectivity Managers): 1350 OMS-SDH, 1350 OMS-SONET, 1350 OMS-PKT, 1350
OMS-WDM.
CPM EML
CPM provides a specific add-on to the Element Manager through a CPM EML plug-in.
The CPM EML can be plugged inside 1350 OMS-EML to manage Historical
Performance Monitoring Counters. Stored PM data can be retrieved for visualization and
reporting at a later time.

CPM GUI Server


The CPM GUI Server is a single component that manages all CPM specificities needed
for PM data representation. The main role of the CPM GUI Server is to export the CPM
Object model to the MS GUI Renderer. All of the objects that are exposed by CPM NML
and by CPM EML are known by the CPM GUI Server. The CPM GUI Server is federated
(that is, a single instance is deployed and communicates with all CPM NML and CPM
EML plug-ins).
Features of the CPM GUI Server include:
• Capability to dynamically add/remove new interfaces toward new CPM NML and/or
new CPM EML plug-ins
• Navigation toward windows available in the same Rendering schema (Internal
Navigations) and toward an External System (External Navigation) intended as other
systems having a dedicated Proprietary User Interface
• Interfacing with the generic MS-GUI Renderer for data visualization
Note: The CPM GUI Server has no data persistency.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-4 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Architectural Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure represents the global CPM GUI Server architecture:

Figure 5-1 CPM GUI Server Architecture

CPM GUI Server Functionalities


The following list of functionalities are included in CPM GUI Server:
• Management of a list of PM objects to be displayed
• Management of properties of PM objects to be displayed
• Management of inventories
• Management of the following operations related to PM objects, including creation,
deletion, set, get, inventories, and other operations
– PmMeasure
– PmTransport
– PmTps
– PmReports
– PmTCA
• Management of notification events related to PM objects (including object
creation/deletion/attribute value change)
• Management of report profiles and report generation (both manual and scheduled)
• Management of internal and external navigation
• Management of interfaces toward the MS-GUI Renderer
• Management of interfaces toward CPM NML
• Management of interfaces toward the CPM NML database
• Management of interfaces toward the CPM EML database
• Arrangement of data for graphical visualization
• Filtering capability

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-5
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Architectural Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Searching capability
• Paging management
• Delta value evaluations (for Ethernet incremental counters)

CPM NML
CPM NML is a subsystem composed of the following applications:
• CPM Core manages the following interfaces: CPM DB Interface, CPM GUI Interface,
CPM AAL Interface, and CPM NBI Interface.
The CPM Core application manages the following functions:
– All commands and responses coming from various interfaces
– The Internal CPM object model
– The CPM NML database persistency
– Scheduled operations
• CPM INV manages all inventory requests from the CPM GUI Interface.
• CPM HD Report Generation manages interaction with CPM EML components
through CPM EML Database access. This application manages the supported counter
set for each PMTP.
• CPM NML Database contains the CPM NML persistent model.
The following functionalities are included in CPM NML:
• Management of the CPM NML internal model
• Management of PM Start/PM Stop operations
• Management of different PM granularity
• Management of the purge policy for PM data
• Management of requests from the hosting application through the DB Interface
• Management of inventories
• Management of operations related to the following PM objects, including creation,
deletion, set, get, inventories, and other operations.
– PmMeasure
– PmTransport
– PmTps
– PmReports
– PmTCA
• Management of notification events related to PM objects (including object
creation/deletion/attribute value change)
• Management of report profiles and report generation (both manual and scheduled)
• Management of interfaces toward the MS GUI Server
• Management of interfaces toward the CPM EML Database
• Management of interfaces toward the External OSS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-6 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Architectural Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Management of the CPM NML Database
• Scheduled triggering operation
The following figure shows the CPM NML subsystem and its location inside the general
1350 OMS architecture.

Figure 5-2 CPM NML Subsystem Architecture

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-7
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Architectural Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CPM EML
The CPM EML is a subsystem composed by the following applications:
• CPM Parser used to manage the EMLIM File Interface, which manages the parsing of
files produced by all Network Adapters for all technologies and the storing of PM
Counter values in CPM EML database.
• CPM File Producer used to manage the production of files to be exported by the IOO
component.
• CPM EML Database which contains the CPM EML persistent model.
The following functionalities are included in CPM EML:
• Management of the CPM EML internal model
• Storing of PMTPs and related counter values in the CPM EML database
• Management of files produced by different Network Adapters
• Management of inventories
• Production of files for IOO
The following figure shows the CPM EML subsystem and its location inside the general
1350 OMS architecture.

Figure 5-3 CPM EML Subsystem Architecture

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-8 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Architectural Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CPM GUI Server Interfaces
CPM GUI Server Interfaces include the following:
• External Interfaces - The CPM-NBI Interface allow an External System (OSS) to
extract PM information from 1350 OMS.
• Internal Interfaces - allow the CPM GUI Server to request all operations on PM
objects. This interface is a CORBA interface supporting Notification Service (for
asynchronous events). Over this interface, the CPM GUI Server plays the role of
Client while the CPM NML plays the role of Server.
• Database Interfaces - have direct access to the CPM NML database. The CPM GUI
Server can access many CPM NML contemporary databases (one per technology).
This means that the CPM GUI Server encapsulates the CPM NML relational model. A
dynamic mechanism allows the CPM GUI Server to add/remove new CPM NML
database instances.
• CPM EML Database - has direct access to the CPM EML database. The CPM GUI
Server can access many CPM EML contemporary databases (one per Network
Adapter). This means that the CPM GUI Server encapsulates the CPM EML relational
model. A dynamic mechanism allows the CPM GUI Server to add/remove new CPM
EML database instances.

CPM NML Interfaces


CPM NML Interfaces include the following:
• External Interfaces
– CPM-NBI Interface - allows an External System (OSS) to extract PM information
from 1350 OMS.
– Database Interface - allows all Network Manager Applications hosting CPM NML
to drive PM activities on connectivity. Results are exposed by CPM NML through
a DB view. The following operations are defined over the Interface: Connectivity
Creation, Deletion, Modification; Start/Stop PM over a Connectivity;
Connectivity Implementation/Deimplementation; Connectivity Change Topology
(such as add/remove terminations); Connectivity Synchronization (for
realignment).
– CPM-AAL Interface (Application Adaptation Layer) - allows the CPM NML to
perform provisioning operations toward Network Adapters (and consequently
toward Network Elements) in a way that is completely independent from the
adopted Management Protocol. The AAL interface is technology-independent.
AAL implements the following functionalities: Start PM on Termination Points;
Stop PM on Termination Points; Manage TCA Profiles (create, delete, and
correlate).
• Internal Interfaces
CPM-GUI Interface - allows the CPM GUI Server to request all operations on PM
objects. This interface is a CORBA interface supporting Notification Service (for
asynchronous events). Over this interface, the CPM GUI Server plays the role of
Client while the CPM NML plays the role of Server.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-9
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Architectural Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Database Interfaces
– CPM NML Database - has direct access to the CPM NML database (its own
database). Each CPM NML can only access its own database instance (while
horizontal access from one CPM NML plug toward the database of another CPM
NML plug is not allowed).
– CPM EML Database - has direct access to the CPM EML database. The CPM
NML can access many CPM EML contemporary databases (one per Network
Adapter). This means that CPM NML encapsulates the CPM EML relational
model. A dynamic mechanism allows CPM NML to add/remove new CPM EML
database instances.

CPM EML Interfaces


CPM EML Interfaces include the following:
• External Interface
– File Interface - allows EMLIM applications to publish PM files containing all
Terminations Points with Historical PM data collection/production enabled, and
related counter values for each managed Network Element and for each
technology. Three types of files are produced: Description File, Configuration
File, and Transfer File.
• IOO Interface - allows two types:
– Unsolicited - where a set of files is periodically produced by CPM EML and IOO
uses those files to periodically export PM data toward External Systems.
– Solicited: IOO - allows access to the CPM EML database extracting PM data for a
filtered set of termination points and for a given period after a specific request
coming from an External System is made.
• Internal Interface - This is not applicable for this release.
• Database Interfaces
– CPM EML Database - CPM NML has direct access to the CPM EML database.
CPM NML can access many CPM EML contemporary databases (one per
Network Adapter). This means that CPM NML encapsulates the CPM EML
relational model. A dynamic mechanism allows CPM NML to add/remove new
CPM EML database instances.

CPM Architecture and Transaction Behavior between CPM Elements and External Applications
The following sections present the main behaviors for CPM architecture and transactions
between CPM elements and external applications.
• Start PM over a connectivity
• PM data storage at CPM EML
• On-demand report generation
Start PM Over a Connectivity
The following figure depicts the Start PM Sequence.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-10 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Architectural Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-4 Start PM Sequence Flowchart

1
The operator starts PM over a Connectivity made by several TPs.
2
The Connectivity Manager accepts the request and turns over all information to CPM
NML through the DB Interface.
3
CPM NML accepts the request, prepares its internal structures, and sends the list of TPs
to be started to API, which implements the AAL interface.
4
The AAL API translates the request to Start PM over TPs toward Network Adapters,
using the right Management Protocol.
5
Each Network Adapter turns the request over to managed NEs.
PM Data Storage at CPM EML
The following figure depicts the Data Storage on CPM EML.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-11
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Architectural Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-5 CPM EML Data Storage Flowchart

On-Demand Report Generation


The following figure depicts the Report Generation Sequence.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-12 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Architectural Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-6 CPM Report Generation Sequence Flowchart

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-13
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts PM Report Analysis

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PM Report Analysis
PM Report
PM reports can be used for analytical purposes of performance data for specific
components of 1350 OMS. When an analysis is required, PM reports are generated per
user specifications.
The information that follows provides a general summary of the processes required to
produce PM reports. Some activities are optional. See “Generate Tabular, Line Chart, or
Bar Chart Reports” (p. 6-45) for specific steps to generate reports.
• Choose a filter combination.
• Select Performance Entities.
• Use Search functions to select Performance Entities.
• Set Reporting Criteria.
• Select Performance Parameters of the selected Performance Entities.
• Set the threshold for Performance Entities.
• Set presentation options for the report.
• Set the user customized label options for the TP label.
• Trigger the Report Generation.
• Manipulate Reports (tabular or graphical report).
Note: Be aware that for 1830PSS Network Elements the PM collection for TPs is
available only for NML enabled TPs, because a configuration parameter setup during
System Configuration phase is set to have a value=FALSE as default, which indicates
that SNA process, which manages 1830PSS NEs, collects PM only on NML enabled
TP's To have the collection also for the other TPs, the default value should be set to
TRUE as explained in the 1350 OMS EML Guide, chapter 4 “Configuration”.

Selective PM
Description
PM data collection is enhanced to improve the efficiency and scalability of the system.
The Selective PM feature gives the user control over which connections to monitor with
PM data collection. Monitoring is turned on only for those connections of interest, for all
others, PM collection is turned off. This feature also improves the efficiency and
scalability of the system by limiting the PM monitoring to only those connections of
interest.
PM monitoring can also be turned on either when the connection is first provisioned in
the network or at any time thereafter from the 1350 OMS Trail/Path Connection List
modify capability. The 1350 OMS manages the life cycle of the connection by passing the
connection through several states.The last two states in the implementation process are
Implemented and Commissioned. PM monitoring may be started at the Implemented
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-14 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts Selective PM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
state and monitored to ensure stability before moving the connection to the
Commissioned state. The user has the option of selecting either 15 minute and/or 24
hour PM data collection. Once the connection is provisioned in the network, the user may
enable/disable PM data collection at any time by modifying the connection from the 1350
OMS Path/Trail Connection lists. When PM is enabled, the user may view the results of
the PM data collection on all ports associated with a connection through the PM Search
Menu items either at a connection or a port level. The viewing of PM data has not
changed with this enhancement. The advantage of the Selective PM feature is that PM
data is only collected on ports of active connections where the user has requested PM data
collection. PM data is not collected on other ports. This reduces the overall processing
and allows for improved scalability of the system. If the user is interested in monitoring
PM data on ports that are not part of a connection, then they can bring up the Web User
Interface from the system and track the PM data for those additional ports.

Search Functions
Search Functions
Search function buttons are available on the main toolbar for both EML and NML
Domains. Search functions can be accessed from the Search button. Results are displayed
in tables that show the search results based on the search criteria. Some Search sublevel
buttons offer drop-down menus with additional sublevels to enhance the search or action
activities.
From the main toolbar, the following search function is available for the EML List:
• Monitored NEs/TPs
From the main toolbar, the following search functions are available for the NML List:
• List Measures
• List Unassociated Transports
• List Report Profiles
• List TCA Profiles
• List NML NE
From a List displayed as a result of a Search function, the user can right-click on a
specific item in the List. A drop-down menu is displayed from which additional activities
can be selected.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-15
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts Action Functions

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Action Functions
Action Functions
Action function buttons are available on the main toolbar for both EML and NML
Domains. Action functions can be accessed from the Action button. Results are displayed
in tables that show the action results based on the action search criteria. Some Action
sublevel buttons offer drop-down menus with additional sublevels to enhance the action
activities.
From the main toolbar, the following action functions are available for the EML List:
• Export TPs to CSV File
• Search by Name
• Search by Value
From the main toolbar, the following action functions are available for the NML List:
• Create TCA
• Create Measures
• Create Report Profile
• Export TPs to CSV File
From a List displayed as a result of an action function, the user can right-click on a
specific item in the List. A drop-down menu is displayed from which additional action
activities (including searches) can be selected. As an example, the following sublevel
actions are available from a TP List:
• Generate Report
• Generate Line Chart Report
• Generate Bar Chart Report

TP Values
TP Values
Termination Points (TPs) can be searched by Value.
TP Values conditions include the following. Up to five comparisons can be made if
desired. Less than five comparisons are valid.
• Parameter Lists Area - This section has up to five areas that display parameters in
value conditions. Selections are made from the icon available which opens a Counters
pop-up window.
• Compare Operator Lists Area - This section appears to the right of the Parameter Lists
and has up to five drop-down menus associated with each of the five parameters
displayed. The user can select comparison operators in value conditions. Valid values
include: > (greater than), < (less than), or = (equal to).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-16 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts TP Values

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Value Boxes Area - This section appears to the right of the Compare Operator Lists
and has up to five areas, each associated with one of the five parameters displayed.
The user can enter the values in value conditions. Science expressions are allowed;
however, rule limitations apply.
• Connect Operator Lists Area- This section appears to the left of the Parameter Lists
and has up to four drop-down menus. The user can select the Connect Operators
between two value conditions if more complex searches are required. Valid values
include: AND or OR.

NML Measure Management


NML Measure Management
Measure Management activities are only available for NML and include the following
activities:
• Create Measure
• Modify Measure
• Delete Measure
• Start Measure
• Stop Measure
• Consist Measure
A list is displayed showing the measure attributes. The NML measure can be SDH, WDM
or Ethernet type.

NML Transport Management


NML Transport Management
Transport Management activities are only available for NML. The Transport Management
function manages PM transport on NML.
Transport Management includes the following activities:
• Associate Transport with Measure
• Unassociate Transport from Measure
• Generate Tabular Report
• Generate Bar Chart Report
• Generate Line Chart Report
• Generate CSV Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-17
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts NML TP Management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NML TP Management
NML TP Management
Termination Point (TP) Management activities are only available for NML. The TP
Management function manages PM TPs on NML.
TP Management includes the following activities:
• Associate TP with Measure
• Unassociate TP from Measure
• Start TP
• Stop TP
• Delete TP

NML TCA Management


NML TCA Management
Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) Management activities are available for NML/SDH and
NML/WDM.
TCA Management includes the following activities:
• Create TCA
• TCA Selection
• Delete TCA

NML Audit Management


NML Audit Management
Audit Management activities are only available for NML.
Audit Management includes the following activities:
• NML NE Selection
• Generate Audit for NE
• Generate Audit for TP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-18 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts NML Report Profile Management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NML Report Profile Management


NML Report Profile Management
Report Profile Management activities are only available for NML. This activity allows the
user to manage the report profile on NML.
Report Profile Management includes the following activities:
• Create Report Profile
• Report Profile Selection
• Modify Report Profile
• Delete Report Profile
• Correlate Report Profile with Measure
• Uncorrelate Report Profile from Measure

Report Generation Concepts


Report Generation Concepts
The following concepts apply to PM report generation:
• The Start Point applies to all TPs which already have been selected in a previous TP
List table. Following the path: Sent to > Generate PM Report > Start Points allows
the user to send another TP from a previous TP List to the Wizard window, if the
Wizard window is open.
• From Start Time and To End Time fields can be entered manually or by using the
available icon for date and time selections.
• Granularity options available are dependent on items selected in the TP List.
• The Note area displays comments about an item when the mouse is moved over a
specific item.
• The Apply and OK buttons are grayed out and not available until all reporting criteria
has been entered.
• The Cancel button causes the user to exit the Wizard without generating a report.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-19
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts Tabular Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tabular Reports
Tabular Reports
A Tabular Report displays Measurements from multiple TPs in a table(s) for EML or
NML.
Note: A Measured Parameter may not totally cover the complete time interval. In this
case, there are TPs displayed with a Status of LOD.
The report format presentation for multiple Measurement Points in a table and for one
item per table are as follows
• Each column displays the values of the Measurements of a single Measured
Parameter.
• The name and/or unit of the Measured Parameter is displayed above each column.
• Each row displays the data at one Measurement Point/timestamp combination.
• The name of the Measurement Point and its timestamp are displayed to the left of
each row.
• Rows are sorted according to their timestamps from top to bottom.
• When a Measurement Point or a Measured Parameter is modified, the report is
updated according to the new selection. If a Measurement Point is modified, all rows
are displayed by default when a report is generated. If a Measured Parameter is
modified, all columns are displayed by default when a report is generated.
• When a Measurement is not available, there is an indication of such in the NA cell of
the report.
• When a column width is modified, the column width is saved for future report
generation.
• If you right-click in a cell, a pop-up menu is displayed with an option to Sort. This
option allows you to select how a column is sorted. A selected column can be sorted
in ascending or descending order on parameter value.
• If you right-click a column cell name, a pop-up menu is displayed with an option for
Statistic. This option allows you to display the Statistic information on the column in
a message window.
• If you right-click a parameter name cell, a pop-up menu is displayed with an option
for Set Threshold. This option allows you to set the threshold of this parameter in the
Threshold Setting page. If the value of one table cell exceeds its threshold, its
background cell color is highlighted. An orange color indicates that the warning
threshold has been exceeded. A red color indicates that the critical threshold has been
exceeded.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-20 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts Tabular Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• In addition, for a Tabular Report displaying only one entity per table, the following
report formats apply:
– By default, the data of the first selected Measurement Point is presented in the
first table, the data for the second selection is presented in the second table, and so
forth.
– Redundant tables are not displayed.
– Above each table, there is a drop-down menu and a set of buttons to allow
selection of a Measurement Point, which is then displayed in the table. A
Measurement Point can be selected with one click by using the first, previous,
next, and last buttons.
For Measured Parameters, special values displayed include:
• NA - indicates that the Measurement is not available
• NM - indicates that the Measurement is not monitored
• NS - indicates that the Measurement is not supported
In general, the user can perform the following actions on a Tabular Report:
• Resize columns
• Scroll to view preceding or subsequent contents
• Sort a specified parameter

Line Chart Reports


Line Chart Reports
A Line Chart Report displays the values of all types of graphical reports in line shapes for
EML and NML.
Note: In the Line Chart, a special value of zero (0) indicates Measured parameters.
The report format presentation for a Line Chart follows:
• The values of all types of graphical reports are displayed as lines.
• Each curve on the chart represents the data of one Measurement Point/Measured
Parameter combination.
• The horizontal axis represents the time from left to right, with labels indicating the
timestamps of the Measurements. The horizontal axis represents the time from left to
right, with labels indicating timestamps of the Measurement. This is displayed directly
below the minimum value shown in the chart.
• The vertical axis displays labels indicating the size of the Measurements displayed.
• All curves have a unique color, which is identified in the available legend.
• Not Available Measurements are only displayed when data is represented from a
Measurement category with fixed time intervals such as 15 minutes, or per day.
• When a Measurement of a specific Measured Parameter is missing, there is a
discontinuity in the line that represents the Measured Parameter.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-21
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts Line Chart Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• When loss of data occurs on specific Measurements, either the line section to the left
of the Measurement appears as a dotted line, or the area to the left of the
Measurement appears in a different color.
• To zoom in on a specific area of a chart, an area inside the chart can be selected while
holding down the mouse button.
Line Chart lists displayed include:
• TP List - displays all available TPS in the report. If selected TPs in this list change,
the report is automatically regenerated.
• Parameter List - displays all supported performance parameters in the report. If
selected parameters in this list change, the report is automatically regenerated.
• Line Legend List - displays the color in the list that indicates each performance
parameter.
In general, the user can perform the following actions on a Line Chart Report:
• Select specific TPs in the report
• Do not select specific TPs in the report
• Select specific performance parameters in the report
• Do not select specific performance parameters in the report
• Scroll to view preceding or subsequent contents

Bar Chart Reports


Bar Chart Reports
A Bar Chart Report displays the values of all types of graphical reports in bar shapes for
EML and NML.
Note: In the Bar Chart, a special value of zero (0) indicates Measured parameters.
The report format presentation for a Bar Chart follows:
• The values of all types of graphical reports are displayed as bars.
• The horizontal axis represents the Granularity, TP Label, and Timestamp from left to
right.
• The vertical axis displays labels indicating the size of the Measurements displayed.
• Each bar has a unique color, which indicates a Performance Parameter.
• For Not Available Measurements, the bar changes to a different background color.
• When loss of data occurs on specific Measurements, the bar changes to a different
background color.
In general, the user can perform the following action on a Bar Chart Report:
• Scroll to view preceding or subsequent contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-22 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts Database Administration through the Performance
Monitoring Component
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Database Administration through the Performance Monitoring


Component
Database Administration through PM
In the Performance Monitoring component, several database administration functions can
be performed for EML and NML.
For EML, the following functions can be performed through the PM component:
• View archive rules
• Change archive rules
• Archive sessions
• Purge archive sessions
• Retrieve archive sessions
• Delete archive sessions
• Set up archive processes automatically
• Purge up archive processes automatically
For NML, the following function can be performed through the PM component:
• Setting the threshold for a database alarm

Archive Rule Edit Wizard


When modifying the Archive Rules using the Archive Rule Edit wizard, the following
fields cannot be modified:
• Database - Defines which database will be archived or purged.
• Granularity - Defines the rule as it applies to the Granularity.
When modifying the Archive Rules using the Archive Rule Edit wizard, the following
fields can be modified:
• Auto Mode - Enables/disables the automatic archive/purge function. If this field is set
to True, the archive/purge is performed automatically. If this field is set to False, the
archive/purge is not performed automatically.
• Period - Defines the period for the Session.
• Days of Archive - Defines how many days after the End Time set in the Session that
the automatic Archive is run.
• Days of Delete - Defines how many days after the End Time set in the Session that
the automatic Purge is run. The purge function can also be executed after running the
Archive function.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 5-23
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Concepts Database Administration through the Performance
Monitoring Component
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Archive Session Management Wizard
When performing operations such as Archive, Purge, Retrieve, or Delete Archive
Sessions using the Archive Session Management wizard, the following columns are
displayed on the Archive Sessions Management wizard:
• Number - Defines the serial number for sessions of every database.
• Database - Defines the database name for the current session, meaning that the
archive has been, or will be, done in this database.
• Granularity - Defines the data in which Granularity will be archived.
• Start Time - Identifies the Start Time of the archive scope.
• End Time - Identifies the End Time of the archive scope.
• Archive Time - Identifies the Archive Time of the archive session.
• Delete Time - Identifies the Purge Time of the archive session.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-24 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
6 6erformance Monitoring
P
Tasks

Overview
Purpose
Performance Monitoring tasks discussed in this chapter pertain to Converged
Performance Monitoring (CPM) features that are common across the 1350 OMS product
set. Performance Monitoring tasks that are application-specific are discussed in the
applicable component documents.
For Converged Performance Monitoring (CPM) concepts, see Chapter 5, “Performance
Monitoring Concepts”.

Contents

PM Lists 6-4
Access the 1350 OMS PM Component 6-4
NML Measures List 6-5
List NML Measures 6-6
Select EML Domains 6-7
List EML NEs 6-8
List EML TPs 6-9
Select NML Domains 6-11
List NML Measures 6-12
List NML Transports 6-13
List NML Unassociated Transports 6-14
List NML TPs 6-15
List NML TCAs 6-16
List NML NEs 6-17
View the Properties of a Selected List Item 6-18
Search EML NEs by Name 6-19
Search EML TPs by Name and Type 6-21

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-1
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Search EML TPs by Value 6-23


PM Report Profiles and Reports 6-25
NML Report Profiles List 6-25
List NML Report Profiles 6-26
Create Report Profiles 6-27
Select Report Profiles 6-30
Modify Report Profiles 6-32
Delete Report Profiles 6-35
Correlate Report Profiles with Measures 6-37
Uncorrelate the Default Report Profiles with Measures 6-40
Set the Time for a Generated Report 6-43
Generate Tabular, Line Chart, or Bar Chart Reports 6-45
Set Report Criteria 6-47
Scheduled CSV Report file generation 6-48
Description 6-48
Generate Scheduled CSV Report Files 6-50
PM Measures 6-51
Create Measures 6-51
Modify Measures 6-53
Delete Measures 6-54
Start Measures 6-55
Stop Measures 6-57
Creating SDH Measure 6-59
Consist Measures 6-63
Export NML Measures to a CSV File 6-64
DBA Archive Rules 6-67
View/Change DBA Archive Rules 6-67
Archive/Purge/Retrieve/Delete DBA Archive Sessions 6-69
Automatically Archive or Purge Archive Sessions 6-71
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs 6-72
Start TPs 6-72
Stop TPs 6-74
Delete All Disactive TPs 6-76
Unassociate Transport from Measures 6-78
Export EML and NML TPs to a CSV File 6-80

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-2 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Start Transports 6-82


Stop Transports 6-83
Create TCAs 6-84
Delete TCAs 6-86
Generate an Audit for an NE 6-88
Generate an Audit for a TP 6-89

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-3
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Access the 1350 OMS PM Component
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PM Lists

Access the 1350 OMS PM Component


When to use
Use this task to access the Performance Monitoring (PM) GUI component.
Note: When accessing any aspects of Fault Management, this is the second task that
you should perform to gain component access. See the 1350 OMS Getting Started
Guide for information on accessing the Web Portal, which is the first step required to
access the FM GUI.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “Performance Monitoring Access” (p. 5-3)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)
• “Action Functions” (p. 5-16)

Before you begin


This task does not have any preconditions.

Task
Complete the following steps to access the PM GUI component.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:


• In the left panel, select Provisioning or Operation.
• In the Main View panel, follow the path: Provisioning or Operation > Management.
Result: Various icons appear in the Main View panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the Network Management icon.


Result: Progress messages appear in the Console area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following:


• From the Search button on the main toolbar, select PM, and then make further
selections based on your desired activities.
• From the Action button on the main toolbar, select PM, and then make further
selections based on your desired activities.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-4 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Access the 1350 OMS PM Component
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NML Measures List


Measure List
This List displays the measures for the selected NML PM domain selected.
The displayed parameters for each measure are:
• User Label
• Consistency
• Granularity
• Layer
• State
• Objective
• Start Time
• End Time
• Work State
• Auto Purge
• Security Label
• Purge
• Collect Counter
• Automatic
• Default TCA
• Technology

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-5
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List NML Measures
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List NML Measures


When to use
Use this task to list NML Measures for PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “CPM NML Interfaces” (p. 5-9)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)
• “NML Measure Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


NML Measures must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to list NML Measures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Select NML Domains” (p. 6-11).


Note: The Domain Type selected must be Online.
Result: The PM Domains on NML List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item for which you want to list Measures.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Follow the path: Search > List Measures from the drop-down menus.
Result: A list of PM Measures on NML is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-6 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Select EML Domains
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select EML Domains


When to use
Use this task to select EML Domains for PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM EML” (p. 5-8)
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)

Before you begin


EML Domains must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to select EML Domains.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In Step 3 of the “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4) task, select the Search
button.
Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select PM Domains on EML from the drop-down menu.


Result: A list of PM Domains on EML is displayed.
Note: In the PM Domains on EML list, there are two types of domains: Online
indicates the normal PM database; Offline indicates the archived PM database.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-7
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List EML NEs
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List EML NEs


When to use
Use this task to list EML Network Elements (NEs) in PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM EML” (p. 5-8)
• “CPM EML Interfaces” (p. 5-10)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)

Before you begin


EML NEs must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to list EML NEs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In Step 3 of the “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4) task, select the Search
button.
Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select PM Domains on EML from the drop-down menu.


Result: A list of PM Domains on EML is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Highlight an item in the displayed list.


Note: The Type must be Online.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A pop-up menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Follow the path: Search > Monitored NEs/TPs.


Result: All NEs for the highlighted item are listed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-8 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List EML TPs
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List EML TPs


When to use
Use this task to list EML Termination Points (TPs) in PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM EML” (p. 5-8)
• “CPM EML Interfaces” (p. 5-10)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)
• “TP Values” (p. 5-16)

Before you begin


EML TPs must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to list EML TPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In Step 3 of the “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4) task, select the Search
button.
Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select PM Domains on EML from the drop-down menu.


Result: A list of PM Domains on EML is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Highlight an item in the displayed list.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A pop-up menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Follow the path: Search > Monitored NEs/TPs.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select an EML NE and follow the path: Search > Monitored NEs/TPs.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-9
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List EML TPs
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: All TPs for the highlighted item are listed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-10 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Select NML Domains
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select NML Domains


When to use
Use this task to select NML Domains for PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “CPM NML Interfaces” (p. 5-9)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)

Before you begin


NML Domains must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to select NML Domains.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In Step 3 of the “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4) task, select the Search
button.
Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select PM Domains on NML from the drop-down menu.


Result: A list of PM Domains on NML is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-11
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List NML Measures
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List NML Measures


When to use
Use this task to list NML Measures for PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “CPM NML Interfaces” (p. 5-9)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)
• “NML Measure Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


NML Measures must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to list NML Measures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Select NML Domains” (p. 6-11).


Note: The Domain Type selected must be Online.
Result: The PM Domains on NML List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item for which you want to list Measures.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Follow the path: Search > List Measures from the drop-down menus.
Result: A list of PM Measures on NML is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-12 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List NML Transports
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List NML Transports


When to use
Use this task to list NML Transports for PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “CPM NML Interfaces” (p. 5-9)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)
• “NML Transport Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


NML Transports must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to list NML Transports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “List NML Measures” (p. 6-12).


Result: The PM Transports on NML List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item for which you want to list Transports.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Follow the path: Search > List Transport from the drop-down menus.
Result: A list of PM Transports on NML is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-13
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List NML Unassociated Transports
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List NML Unassociated Transports


When to use
Use this task to list NML Unassociated Transports for PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “CPM NML Interfaces” (p. 5-9)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)
• “NML Transport Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


NML Unassociated Transports must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to list NML Unassociated Transports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “List NML Measures” (p. 6-12).


Result: The PM Measures on NML List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item for which you want to list Unassociated Transports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Follow the path: Search > List Unassociated Transport from the drop-down menus.
Result: A list of PM Unassociated Transports on NML is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-14 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List NML TPs
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List NML TPs


When to use
Use this task to list NML Termination Points (TPs) for PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “CPM NML Interfaces” (p. 5-9)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)
• “NML TP Management” (p. 5-18)

Before you begin


NML TPs must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to list NML TPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “List NML Transports” (p. 6-13).


Result: The PM Transports on NML List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item for which you want to list a TP.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Follow the path: Search > List TP from the drop-down menus.
Result: A list of PM TPs on NML is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-15
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List NML TCAs
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List NML TCAs


When to use
Use this task to list NML Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) for PM. This task only
pertains to SDH.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)
• “NML TCA Management” (p. 5-18)

Before you begin


NML TCAs must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to list NML TCAs for SDH.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Select NML Domains” (p. 6-11).


Result: The Domains on NML List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item for which you want to list a TCA.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Follow the path: Search > List TCA from the drop-down menus.
Result: A list of PM TCAs on NML is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-16 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List NML NEs
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List NML NEs


When to use
Use this task to list NML Network Elements (NEs) for PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)

Before you begin


NML NEs must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to list NML NEs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Select NML Domains” (p. 6-11).


Result: The PM Domains on NML List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item for which you want to list NEs.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Follow the path: Search > List NML NEs from the drop-down menus.
Result: A list of the PM NEs for the selected item on NML is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-17
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks View the Properties of a Selected List Item
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

View the Properties of a Selected List Item


When to use
Use this task to view the properties of various PM List items, including, but not limited
to, Technology, Type, and Instance Name.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “CPM EML” (p. 5-8)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)

Before you begin


Depending on the type of item for which you want to view the Properties, a List must be
open.

Task
Complete the following steps to view the properties of a selected PM List item.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In Step 3 of the “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4) task, select the Search
button.
Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select PM Domains on EML or PM Domains on NML from the drop-down menu.


Result: A list of PM Domains on EML or NML is displayed based on your selection.
Note: In the PM Domains on EML list, there are two types of domains: Online
indicates the normal PM database; Offline indicates the archived PM database.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Highlight the item for which you want to view the properties.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Right-click on the item for which you want to view the properties and select Properties
from the drop-down menu.
Result: The Properties window is displayed containing the properties for the selected
item.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-18 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Search EML NEs by Name
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Search EML NEs by Name


When to use
Use this task to search EML Domains in PM for NE Names.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM EML” (p. 5-8)
• “CPM EML Interfaces” (p. 5-10)

Before you begin


EML Domains must exist in the PM component and contain NE Names.

Task
Complete the following steps to search EML Domains for NE Names.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Select EML Domains” (p. 6-7).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item for which you want to search for NEs by Name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item and select Actions > Search by Name.
Result: The Search by Name window is displayed. Note that the Object and User
Label fields are prepopulated with data based on your item selection in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Search Type Selection area, select Search NE from the drop-down menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Optional. In the Name pattern area, enter the NE Name Pattern. An asterisk (*) can be
used to represent zero (0) or more characters. A question mark (?) can be used to
represent only one character.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Optional. Click on the Get NE Type Release Here words.


If you do not want to select the NE Type Release, go to Step 9.
Result: The NE Type Release pop-up window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select an NE Type and Release Number from the table displayed on the NE Type
Release window.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-19
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Search EML NEs by Name
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click the check mark button.


Result: The NE Type Release pop-up window is closed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click either the Apply or the OK button at the bottom of the Search by Name window.
Note: If you want to exit the Search by Name window without applying any changes,
click the Cancel button at the bottom of the window.
Result: A search function is performed based on your selections and displayed in a
Search by Name table. Table fields include: User Label, Active, Type, Supported
Granularities, and Supported Counters.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-20 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Search EML TPs by Name and Type
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Search EML TPs by Name and Type


When to use
Use this task to search EML Domains in PM for TP Names and Types.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM EML” (p. 5-8)
• “CPM EML Interfaces” (p. 5-10)
• “NML TP Management” (p. 5-18)

Before you begin


EML Domains must exist in the PM component and contain TP Names.

Task
Complete the following steps to search EML Domains for TP Names and Types.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Select EML Domains” (p. 6-7).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item for which you want to search for TPs by Name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item and select Actions > Search by Name.
Result: The Search by Name window is displayed. Note that the Object and User
Label fields are prepopulated with data based on your item selection in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Search Type Selection area, select Search TP from the drop-down menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Optional. In the Name pattern area, enter the TP Name Pattern. An asterisk (*) can be
used to represent zero (0) or more characters. A question mark (?) can be used to
represent only one character.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Optional. Click on the Get TP Type option.


If you do not want to select the TP Types, go to Step 9.
Result: The TP Type pop-up window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select a TP Type from the table displayed on the TP Type window.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-21
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Search EML TPs by Name and Type
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click the check mark button.


Result: The TP Type pop-up window is closed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click either the Apply or the OK button at the bottom of the Search by Name window.
Note: If you want to exit the Search by Name window without applying any changes,
click the Cancel button at the bottom of the window.
Result: A search function is performed based on your selections and displayed in a
Search by Name table. Table fields include: User Label, Active, Type, Supported
Granularities, and Supported Counters.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-22 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Search EML TPs by Value
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Search EML TPs by Value


When to use
Use this task to search EML Domains in PM for TP Values.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM EML” (p. 5-8)
• “NML TP Management” (p. 5-18)

Before you begin


EML Domains must exist in the PM component and contain TP Values.

Task
Complete the following steps to search EML Domains for TP Values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Select EML Domains” (p. 6-7).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item(s) for which you want to search for TPs by Value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item and select Actions > Search by Value.
Result: The Search by Value window is displayed. Note that the Object and User
Label fields are prepopulated with data based on your item selection in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the User Specific area, select one of the options from the drop-down menu.
If you select an option other than User Specific, go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 After selecting the User Specific Granularity option, do the following:


• Select the Start Time using the calendar icon or by manually typing it in.
• Select the End Time using the calendar icon or by manually typing it in.
• Go to Step 7.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-23
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Search EML TPs by Value
PM Lists
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 After selecting either the Latest, Current, or Last ... Until option, make a selection from
the Granularity drop-down menu.
• Select the Parameter List Counter on the left side of the window from the available
icon. In the Counter window, when your selection is made, click the check box.
• Select the Connector in the middle of the window from the drop-down menu. Options
are: < (less than), = (equal to), or > (greater than).
• Enter the Value on the right side of the window. Value conditions entered in this box
can be scientific expressions.
• To enter additional, more complex, conditions, select the connector operator from
drop-down menu at the far left of the window. Options are: And or Or.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click either the Apply or the OK button at the bottom of the Search by Value window.
Note: If you want to exit the Search by Value window without applying any changes,
click the Cancel button at the bottom of the window.
Result: A search function is performed based on your selections and displayed in a
Search by Value table.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-24 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks NML Report Profiles List
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PM Report Profiles and Reports

NML Report Profiles List


Report Profiles List
The list of NML Report Profiles for PM is displayed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-25
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List NML Report Profiles
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List NML Report Profiles


When to use
Use this task to list NML Report Profiles for PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)
• “NML Report Profile Management” (p. 5-19)

Before you begin


NML Report Profiles must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to list NML Report Profiles.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Select NML Domains” (p. 6-11).


Result: The PM Domains on NML List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item for which you want to list Report Profiles.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Follow the path: Search > List Report Profile from the drop-down menus.
Result: A list of the PM Report Profile for the selected item on NML is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-26 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Create Report Profiles
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Report Profiles


When to use
Use this task to create an NML Report Profile.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Report Profile Management” (p. 5-19)

Before you begin


An NML PM Domain must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to create an NML Report Profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “Select NML Domains” (p. 6-11) task.
Result: A list of PM Domains on NML is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a PM Domain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Create Report Profile.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-27
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Create Report Profiles
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create Report Profile Wizard window opens.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-28 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Create Report Profiles
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Insert a User Labell to be used for the Report Profile.


Select an option from the drop-down list that appears next to each item below:
• Destination Type
• Window
• Format
• Security Label
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Insert here the path and the name for the destination file.
Enter a value in the following field.
• Destination Name
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click either the OK or Apply button to create a Report Profile.


Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Create Report Profile wizard
without creating a Report Profile.
Result: The Report Profile is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-29
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Select Report Profiles
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Report Profiles


When to use
Use this task to select an NML Report Profile.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Report Profile Management” (p. 5-19)

Before you begin


An NML Report Profile must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to select an NML Report Profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “Select NML Domains” (p. 6-11) task.
Result: A list of PM Domains on NML is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a PM Domain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Search > Report Profiles.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-30 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Select Report Profiles
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: A list of all Report Profiles in the PM Domain selected is displayed.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 View the Report Profile information of interest to you.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-31
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Modify Report Profiles
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modify Report Profiles


When to use
Use this task to modify an NML Report Profile.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Report Profile Management” (p. 5-19)

Before you begin


An NML Report Domain must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to modify an NML Report Profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “Select NML Domains” (p. 6-11) task.
Results: A list of PM Domains on NML is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a PM Domain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Search > Report Profiles


Result: The Report Profiles List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the Report Profile.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Modify Report Profile.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-32 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Modify Report Profiles
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Modify Report Profile Wizard window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click on any parameter that can be changed, and modify the value of the parameter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click either the OK or Apply button to modify a Report Profile.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-33
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Modify Report Profiles
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Modify Report Profile wizard
without modifying a Report Profile.
Result: The Report Profile is modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-34 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Delete Report Profiles
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Report Profiles


When to use
Use this task to delete an NML Report Profile.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Report Profile Management” (p. 5-19)

Before you begin


An NML Report Profile must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to delete an NML Report Profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “Select Report Profiles ” (p. 6-30) task.
Result: A list of NML Report Profiles is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a Report Profile.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select: Actions > Delete Report Profile.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-35
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Delete Report Profiles
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A confirmation box opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Yes to confirm the action.


Result: The Report Profile is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-36 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Correlate Report Profiles with Measures
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Correlate Report Profiles with Measures


When to use
Use this task to correlate Report Profiles with Measures.
Since all PM measures are correlated by default to a system available report profiles, you
had to uncorrelate the existing report profiles with the measures to correlate report
profiles of your choice.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Measure Management” (p. 5-17)
• “NML Report Profile Management” (p. 5-19)

Before you begin


An NML Measure must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to correlate an NML Report Profile with a Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML Measures” (p. 6-12) task.
Result: A list of PM Measures is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the Measure for which you want to correlate a Report Profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Correlate with Report Profile.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-37
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Correlate Report Profiles with Measures
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: The Object and User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on the
Measure that you selected.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-38 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Correlate Report Profiles with Measures
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Correlation Measure Report Profile Wizard window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click on the appropriate icon to open the Report Profile table.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select a Report Profile of the desired window.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click OK to confirm the selection.


Result: Report Profile selection is confirmed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click either the OK or Apply button to correlate a Measure with a Report Profile.
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Correlation Measure Report
Profile wizard without correlating a Report Profile with a Measure.
Result: The Report Profile is correlated to the Measure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-39
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Uncorrelate the Default Report Profiles with Measures
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Uncorrelate the Default Report Profiles with Measures


When to use
Use this task to uncorrelate Report Profiles with Measures.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Measure Management” (p. 5-17)
• “NML Report Profile Management” (p. 5-19)

Before you begin


An NML Measure must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to uncorrelate a Report Profile with a Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML Measures” (p. 6-12) task.
Result: A list of PM Measures is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the Measure for which you want to uncorrelate a Report Profile.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Uncorrelate with Report Profile.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-40 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Uncorrelate the Default Report Profiles with Measures
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: The Object and User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on the
Measure that you selected.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-41
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Uncorrelate the Default Report Profiles with Measures
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Uncorrelation Measure Report Profile Wizard window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click on the appropriate icon to open the Associated Report Profile List table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select the Report Profile to be uncorrelated.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click OK to confirm the selection.


Result: The Report Profile selection is confirmed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click either the OK or Apply button to uncorrelate a Measure with a Report Profile.
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Uncorrelation Measure Report
Profile wizard without uncorrelating a Report Profile with a Measure.
Result: The Report Profile is uncorrelated from the Measure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-42 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Set the Time for a Generated Report
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the Time for a Generated Report


When to use
Use this task to set the time for a generated report for either EML or NML PM.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM EML” (p. 5-8)
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “Report Generation Concepts” (p. 5-19)
• “Action Functions” (p. 5-16)

Before you begin


NML or EML Domains must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to set the time for a generated report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In Step 3 of the “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4) task, select the Action
button.
Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select Set Report Options from the drop-down menu.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-43
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Set the Time for a Generated Report
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Set Report Options pop-up window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Check the box Unified Counter Name if you want to use a unique counter name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Set Time Shift area, click the drop-down menu to select the timestamp for a report.
Options are: Use Start Time or Use End Time. The default is Use End Time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click on either the OK button or the Apply button on the Set Report Options window.
Note: Clicking the Cancel button allows you to exit the Set Report Options pop-up
window without saving the preferences.
Result: The Time Shift is set for the report.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-44 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Generate Tabular, Line Chart, or Bar Chart Reports
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generate Tabular, Line Chart, or Bar Chart Reports


When to use
Use this task to generate Performance Monitoring Tabular, Line Chart, or Bar Chart
Reports for analytical purposes.

Related Information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Report Generation Concepts” (p. 5-19)
• “Tabular Reports” (p. 5-20)
• “Line Chart Reports” (p. 5-21)
• “Bar Chart Reports” (p. 5-22)

Before you begin


PM data must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following general steps to generate PM reports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in either “List EML TPs” (p. 6-9) or “List NML TPs” (p. 6-15).
Result: A TP List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight one or more TPs for which you want to generate a report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item(s).


Result: A pop-up menu is displayed with additional options for selection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the pop-up menu, select one of the following paths depending on which type of
report you want to generate.
• Actions > Generate Tabular Report
• Actions > Generate Line Chart Report
• Actions > Generate Bar Chart Report
Result: The Generate Report window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Perform the steps in “Set Report Criteria” (p. 6-47) to set the report criteria.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-45
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Generate Tabular, Line Chart, or Bar Chart Reports
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Report criteria is set.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Perform the steps required to set the report destination.


Result: Report destination is set.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click the OK or Apply button at the bottom of the Generate Report window.
Result: The report selected in Step 4 is generated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-46 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Set Report Criteria
PM Report Profiles and Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set Report Criteria


When to use
Use this task to set report criteria to generate Tabular, Line Chart, or Bar Chart PM
reports.

Related information
See the following topics in this document:
• “Report Generation Concepts” (p. 5-19)
• “Tabular Reports” (p. 5-20)
• “Line Chart Reports” (p. 5-21)
• “Bar Chart Reports” (p. 5-22)

Before you begin


PM data must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to set report criteria to generate PM reports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “Generate Tabular, Line Chart, or Bar Chart Reports”
(p. 6-45) task.
Results: The Generate Report Window is displayed for the type of report that you
want to generate.
Note: The User Label and Granularity fields are prepopulated based on the TP
selection in “Generate Tabular, Line Chart, or Bar Chart Reports” (p. 6-45).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the From Time for the report using the calendar icon to the far right of the field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the End Time for the report using the calendar icon to the far right of the field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the Granularity for the report using the drop-down menu to the far right of the
field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click either the OK or Apply button at the bottom of the Generate Report window to
generate the requested report.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-47
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Scheduled CSV Report file generation

Description
By default all PM measures are correlated to system available report profiles. There are
two default report profiles available in the system which can generate CSV files every
two hours and 24 hours. 15 minutes PM measures are always correlated to two hours
report profile by default and 24 hours PM measures are always correlated to 24 hours
report profile by default.
All PM measures are correlated by default to a system available report profiles. To change
the correlated report profile, the user has to uncorrelate the existing report profiles with
the measures to correlate a previously created report profiles.
For all the PM measures, the system generated CSV files are stored in the directory
/user/system/<NMS directory>/CPM/outputfiles/

Figure 6-1 CSV Report File Directory List

CSV Report Field Description


The table describes the CSV report file fields.

Field Description
Measure PM measure name
Transport PM transport name
TP_Object Termination Point type.
Granularity Granularity selected by the user, possible
values are 15 minutes and 24 hours.
NE NE name.
TP PM transport name and values.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-48 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Description
Scheduled CSV Report file generation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Field Description
Side This field displays the PM transport side
indicating if it is sink or source.
From Date and time string in the format
YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm
Counter1......counter<n> Counter names
LOD This value summarizes the global status of all
the counters present in the current line. It can
have the following values: 0 indicates that all
counter values in the current line are good. -1
indicates that at least one counter is in loss of
data (LOD) condition. -2 indicates that all
counters in the line are not measured (NM). -3
indicates that at least one counter is in not
available (NA) condition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-49
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Generate Scheduled CSV Report Files
Scheduled CSV Report file generation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generate Scheduled CSV Report Files


When to use
Use this task to set report criteria to schedule CSV Report file generation.

Related information
To change the default CSV file generation frequency and the location of the CSV files
report profile, the user has to perform the following procedure.
See the following topics in this document:
• “Create Report Profiles” (p. 6-27)
• “Correlate Report Profiles with Measures ” (p. 6-37)
• “Uncorrelate the Default Report Profiles with Measures ” (p. 6-40)

Before you begin


PM data must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to generate scheduled CSV Report file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Perform “Create Report Profiles” (p. 6-27) to create a report profile.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the PM measure you want to correlate to the new report profile. Perform “List
NML Measures” (p. 6-6) to display the measures and select the measure to uncorrelate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Perform “Uncorrelate the Default Report Profiles with Measures ” (p. 6-40) to uncorrelate
the default report profile with a PM measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Perform “Correlate Report Profiles with Measures ” (p. 6-37) to correlate the
user-labelled report profile with a PM measure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-50 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Create Measures
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PM Measures

Create Measures
When to use
Use this task to create an NML PM Measure.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Measure Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


An NML PM Domain must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to create an NML PM Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “Select NML Domains” (p. 6-11) task.
Result: A list of PM Domains on NML is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a PM Domain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Create Measure.


Result: The Create Measure Wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select an option from the drop-down list that appears next to each item below:
• Granularity
• Consistency
• State
• Layer
• Work State
• Objective
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-51
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Create Measures
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Auto Purge
• Purge
• Security Label
• Collect Counter
• Automatic
• Default TCA
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select the Start Time from the icon calendar to the far right of the field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select the End Time from the icon calendar to the far right of the field.
Note: If no End Time is selected, the PM Measure must be stopped by the user
manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click either the OK or Apply button to create a Measure.


Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Create Measure wizard without
creating a Measure.
Result: The Measure is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-52 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Modify Measures
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modify Measures
When to use
Use this task to modify an NML PM Measure.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Measure Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


An NML Measure must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to modify an NML PM Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML Measures” (p. 6-12) task.
Result: A list of NML Measures is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Modify Measure.


Result: The Modify Measure Wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click on any of the Measure parameters that can be changed, and make the modification
to the value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click either the OK or Apply button to modify a Measure.


Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Modify Measure wizard without
modifying a Measure.
Result: The selected Measure is modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-53
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Delete Measures
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Measures
When to use
Use this task to delete an NML PM Measure.
Note: Before deleting a Measure, all of the PM Transports or TPs that are managed by
the PM Measure that you want to delete should be removed from the PM Measure.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Measure Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


An NML Measure must exist in the PM component.
All of the PM Transports or TPs that are managed by the PM Measure that you want to
delete should be removed from the PM Measure.

Task
Complete the following steps to delete an NML PM Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML Measures” (p. 6-12) task.
Result: A list of NML Measures is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Delete Measure.


Result: The Delete Measure wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click either the OK or Apply button to delete the selected Measure.


Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Delete Measure wizard without
deleting a Measure.
Result: The selected Measure is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-54 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Start Measures
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Start Measures
When to use
Use this task to start an NML PM Measure. This task starts Performance Monitoring on
all of the TPs which belong to the selected Measure.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Measure Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


An NML Measure must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to start an NML PM Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML Measures” (p. 6-12) task.
Result: A list of NML Measures is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Start Measure.


Note: The ID and User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on the Measure
that you selected.
Result: The Start Measure wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Check the Start check box and click either the OK or Apply button to start the selected
Measure.
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Start Measure wizard without
starting PM on TPs that belong to the selected Measure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-55
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Start Measures
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Performance Monitoring on all of the TPs which belong to the selected
Measure is started.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-56 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Stop Measures
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Stop Measures
When to use
Use this task to stop an NML PM Measure. This task stops Performance Monitoring on
all of the TPs which belong to the selected Measure.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Measure Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


An NML Measure must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to stop an NML PM Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML Measures” (p. 6-12) task.
Result: A list of NML Measures is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Stop Measure.


Note: The ID and User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on the Measure
that you selected.
Result: The Stop Measure wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Check the Stop check box and click either the OK or Apply button to stop the selected
Measure.
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Stop Measure wizard without
stopping PM on TPs that belong to the selected Measure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-57
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Stop Measures
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Performance Monitoring on all of the TPs which belong to the selected
Measure is stopped.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-58 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Creating SDH Measure
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating SDH Measure


When to use
Use this task to create an SDH measure for the Performance Monitoring.

Related Information
This task does not have any related information.

Before you begin


Activate the Web Portal application and open the Network Management GUI. 1350 OMS
SDH component should be installed.

Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the GUI select the menu path Search > PM > PM Domains on NML.

Figure 6-2 Search > PM>PM Domains on NML

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The list of NML domains is displayed. From the GUI, select a NML PM Domain and then
follow the path Actions > Create Measure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-59
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Creating SDH Measure
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-3 Actions >Create Measure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the following attributes:


• measure name (userlabel) . The measure name can be modified, only if the measure
status is PLANNED.
• Objective. Possible values are:
– Qos ( quality of service ). Starts bidirectional counters
– Maintenance. Starts unidirectional counters - Near End and Far End.
– Transport State NOT SUPPORTED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-60 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Creating SDH Measure
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• start/end time. If you do not specify start/end time, you can subsequently activate
manually the measure by means of the command Measure Start, otherwise the
Measure will be started at the Start Time and stopped at the Stop time.
• defaults tps. You can specify:
– TRUE. The PM transport is created with some default TPs automatically
correlated ( for each of them a PMTP instance is created )
– - One pmtp ( NAP/CAP type ) for a bidirectional transport is enough because the
NE provides the information relevant to both ends (NEAR END + FAR END).
- If the path is broadcast all sink ends are monitored. (Only real ends are
considered.). Virtual NAPs or CAPs are not automatically monitored; the closest
real CTP ( boundary CTP ) will be monitored.
– FALSE. Only the PM transport is created; no pmtp is created.
• Monitored layer. You can specify the layer of the objects monitored by the measure:
– LO - low order
– HO - high order
– All Layers
– CBR
– Data
– MS
• granularity. The granularity is the monitoring frequency, i.e. the frequency of
historical data counters grouping. You can select:
– 24 hours . Data are grouped per day.
– 15 minutes. Data are grouped per quarter of hour.
• Collect Counter. If its value is:
– TRUE, the counters belonging to granularity periods will be collected, when the
measure is activated
– FALSE, the historical data counters will not be collected, even when the measure
is activated. This implies that the goal of the measure is to set Threshold Crossing
Alarm profiles on the termination points only.
• Automatic Purge of the Measure (TRUE/FALSE)
• Purge State of the Measure (when stopped/when terminated)
• Automatic deletion Hystorical Data (TRUE/FALSE)
• period HDs in database n.o of days of permanence
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click on button OK to confirm the creation.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To verify the successful creation of the measure, check on the log window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 You can now find the new measure by selecting the NML PM Domain and performing
Search > Measures. The Measure List is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-61
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Creating SDH Measure
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-4 Measure List

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-62 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Consist Measures
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Consist Measures
When to use
Use this task to perform a consistency check on an NML PM Measure.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Measure Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


An NML Measure must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to perform a consistency check on an NML PM Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML Measures” (p. 6-12) task.
Result: A list of NML Measures is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Consist Measure.


Note: The ID and User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on the Measure
that you selected.
Result: The Consist Measure wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Check the Consist check box and click either the OK or Apply button to consist the
selected Measure.
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Consist Measure wizard without
performing a consistency check on a Measure.
Result: A consistency check is performed on the selected Measure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-63
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Export NML Measures to a CSV File
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Export NML Measures to a CSV File


When to use
Use this task to export NML Measures to a CSV file.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Measure Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


NML Domains must exist in the PM component and contain Measures.

Task
Complete the following steps to export NML Measures to a CSV file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “List NML Measures” (p. 6-12).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the measure for which you want to export to a CSV file.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-64 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Export NML Measures to a CSV File
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item and select Actions > Generate Report to CSV File.
Result: The Generate Measure Report to CSV File window is displayed. Note that the
Object, User Label, and Granularity fields are prepopulated with data based on your
item selection in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the From Time area, click on the calendar icon to the right of the text box and select
the Start Time and Date. The earliest selection available is 1 January 1980.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the End Time area, click on the calendar icon to the right of the text box and select the
End Time and Date. The latest selection available is 31 December 2050.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Report File Location area, click the icon to the right of the text box.
Result: The CSV Report File Location table is opened.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select the location where you want the generated file to be sent.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-65
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Export NML Measures to a CSV File
PM Measures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click the check box on the CSV Report File Location table.
Result: The selection is confirmed and the table window is closed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click on either the OK button or the Apply button on the Generate Measure Report to
CSV File window.
Note: Clicking the Cancel button allows you to exit the Generate Measure Report to
CSV File window without exporting a file.
Result: The selected file is exported to the Output File Name entered in Step 4. The
exported file is located on the CpmGui-Server.

Table 6-1 CSV Report Field Description

Field Description
Measure It contains the PM measure name.
Transport It contains the PM transport name.
TP_Object This field defines the Termination Point type.
Granularity This field displays the granularity selected by the user out of
the two possible values; 15 minutes and 24 hours.
NE This field displays the NE name.
TP This field displays the PM transport name and values.
Side This field displays the PM transport side indicating if it is sink
or source.
From It contains the date and time string in the format
YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm.
Counter1......counter<n> It lists the counter names.
LOD This value summarizes the global status of all the counters
present in the current line.
It can have the following values:
• 0 indicates that all counter values in the current line are
good.
• -1 indicates that at least one counter is in loss of data
(LOD) condition.
• -2 indicates that all counters in the line are not measured
(NM).
• -3 indicates that at least one counter is in not available
(NA) condition.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-66 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks View/Change DBA Archive Rules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DBA Archive Rules

View/Change DBA Archive Rules


When to use
Use this task to view or change archive rules as part of PM Database Administration
functions for EML.
Note: Changes can be made using this task to set parameters to archive or purge
Archive Rules.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “Database Administration through the Performance Monitoring Component” (p. 5-23)
• “Archive Rule Edit Wizard” (p. 5-23)

Before you begin


Archive Rules must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to view or change archive rules as part of PM Database
Administration functions for EML.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the path: Search > PM > DB Administration > Archive Rules.
Result: The Archive Rules Setup window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the rule in the Archive Rules Setup window that you want to view or change.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted rule.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Follow the path: Action > Edit.


Result: The Archive Rule Wizard window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Optional. Make changes to any of the editable fields.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click either the OK or Apply button to modify the Archive Rules.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-67
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks View/Change DBA Archive Rules
DBA Archive Rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Archive Rule wizard without
modifying any rules.
Result: The Archive Rule is modified if changes have been made to the existing
Archive Rule.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-68 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Archive/Purge/Retrieve/Delete DBA Archive Sessions
DBA Archive Rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Archive/Purge/Retrieve/Delete DBA Archive Sessions


When to use
Use this task to archive/purge/retrieve/delete selected archive sessions as part of the PM
Database Administration function for Archive Session Management for EML.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “Database Administration through the Performance Monitoring Component” (p. 5-23)
• “Archive Session Management Wizard” (p. 5-24)

Before you begin


This task does not have any preconditions.

Task
Complete the following steps to archive/purge/retrieve/delete selected archive sessions as
part of the PM Database Administration function for Archive Session Management for
EML.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the path: Search > PM > DB Administration > Archive Sessions.
Result: The Archive Sessions Management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the archive session in the Archive Sessions Management window that you want
to archive/purge/retrieve/delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted session.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Follow one of the paths listed below based on the activity that you want to perform for
the selected archive session:
• Actions > Archive
• Actions > Delete
• Actions > Retrieve
• Actions > Delete Session

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-69
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Archive/Purge/Retrieve/Delete DBA Archive Sessions
DBA Archive Rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: If you selected the path Actions > Archive in Step 4, the PM data meeting the
Granularity defined, and occurring between the start and end times specified, is
archived. The archive session is refreshed to display the archive time, and a new
session is generated.
If you selected the path Actions > Delete in Step 4, the PM data meeting the
Granularity defined, and occurring between the start and end times specified, is
purged. The purge can be executed after the archive.
If you selected the path Actions > Retrieve in Step 4, the PM data meeting the
Granularity defined, and occurring between the start and end times specified, is
retrieved.
If you selected the path Actions > Delete Session in Step 4, the PM data archive
session is deleted. A session can only be deleted if a purge has already been
successfully completed.
Note: If a PM data archive session is deleted, then the archived PM data
corresponding to the session cannot be retrieved back.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-70 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Automatically Archive or Purge Archive Sessions
DBA Archive Rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Automatically Archive or Purge Archive Sessions


When to use
Use this task to automatically archive or purge selected archive sessions as part of the PM
Database Administration functionality for EML.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “Database Administration through the Performance Monitoring Component” (p. 5-23)
• “Archive Session Management Wizard” (p. 5-24)

Before you begin


This task does not have any preconditions.

Task
Complete the following steps to automatically archive or purge selected archives as part
of the PM Database Administration function for Archive Session Management for EML.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “View/Change DBA Archive Rules” (p. 6-67).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the specific Archive Rule and edit the Auto mode value to True. This enables the
automatic archiving of the particular PM technology database and granularity
combination based on the value of Days of Archive parameter. The purge of data from the
database (which has already been archived) also occurs automatically based on the value
of Days of Delete parameter.
Result: Selected items are automatically archived or purged.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-71
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks List of Abbreviations
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Termination Points, Transports and TCAs

Start TPs
When to use
Use this task to start supervision of an NML PM TP. This task starts Performance
Monitoring of the TPs selected.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML TP Management” (p. 5-18)

Before you begin


An NML PM Measure and a TP must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to start the supervision on an NML PM TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML TPs” (p. 6-15) task.
Result: A list of NML Termination Points is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Start TP.


Note: The ID and User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on the TP that
you selected.
Result: The Start TP wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select Start.
Note: This step can be performed regardless of the state of the PM Measure which
manages the selected TP.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-72 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Start TPs
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click either the OK or Apply button to start the selected TP.


Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Start TP wizard without starting a
TP.
Result: Performance Monitoring of the TP is started.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-73
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Stop TPs
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Stop TPs
When to use
Use this task to stop supervision of an NML PM TP. This task stops Performance
Monitoring of the TPs selected.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML TP Management” (p. 5-18)

Before you begin


An NML PM Measure and a TP must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to stop supervision on an NML PM TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML TPs” (p. 6-15) task.
Result: A list of NML Termination Points is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Stop TP.


Note: The ID and User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on the TP that
you selected.
Result: The Stop TP wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select Stop.
Note: This step can be performed regardless of the state of the PM Measure which
manages the selected TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click either the OK or Apply button to stop the selected TP.


Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Stop TP wizard without stopping a
TP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-74 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Stop TPs
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Performance Monitoring of the TPs is stopped.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-75
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Delete All Disactive TPs
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete All Disactive TPs


When to use
Use this task to delete all disactive TPs in the selected PM domain.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM EML” (p. 5-8)
• “CPM EML Interfaces” (p. 5-10)
• “Search Functions” (p. 5-15)

Before you begin


EML TPs must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to list EML TPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In Step 3 of the “Access the 1350 OMS PM Component” (p. 6-4) task, select the Search
button.
Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select PM Domains on EML from the drop-down menu.


Result: A list of PM Domains on EML is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Highlight an item in the displayed list.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A pop-up menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Follow the path: Actions > Delete All Disactive TPs.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-76 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Delete All Disactive TPs
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Wizard window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select an the domain on which you want to delete the disactive TPs. Select the delete
check-box and confirm the operation with OK or Apply button.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-77
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Unassociate Transport from Measures
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unassociate Transport from Measures


When to use
Use this task to unassociate an NML PM Transport from a Measure.
Note: The Transport must be stopped before performing this task.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Transport Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


An NML Transport must exist in the PM component.
The Transport must be stopped before performing the unassociation with the Measure.

Task
Complete the following steps to unassociate an NML PM Transport from a Measure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML Transports” (p. 6-13) task.
Result: A list of NML Transports is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight an Associated Transport.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Unassociate from Measure.
Note: The transport ID and User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on the
Unassociated Transport that you selected.
Result: The Unassociate Transport from Measure wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click on the check mark icon.


Result: The Measure selection to unassociate with a Transport is confirmed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click either the OK or Apply button to unassociate the Transport with the selected
Measure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-78 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Unassociate Transport from Measures
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Unassociate Transport wizard
without unassociating a Measure.
Result: The Transport is unassociated from the selected Measure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-79
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Export EML and NML TPs to a CSV File
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Export EML and NML TPs to a CSV File


When to use
Use this task to export EML and NML TPs to a CSV file.

Related information
See the following topics in this document set:
• “CPM EML” (p. 5-8)
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)

Before you begin


EML or NML Domains must exist in the PM component and contain TPs.

Task
Complete the following steps to export EML and NML TPs to a CSV file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in “Select EML Domains” (p. 6-7) or “Select NML Domains” (p. 6-11).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the item(s) for which you want to export TPs to a CSV file.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-80 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Export EML and NML TPs to a CSV File
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item and select Actions > Export TPs to CSV File.
Result: The Export TPs to CSV File window is displayed. Note that the Object and
User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on your item selection in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Output File Name area, enter the location to where you want to export the file.
Note: The following is a sample output file name/path: /user/system/<NMS
directory>/CPM/outputfiles/
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click on either the OK button or the Apply button.


Note: Clicking the Cancel button allows you to exit the Export TPs to CSV File
window without exporting a file.
Result: The selected file is exported to the Output File Name entered in Step 4. The
exported file is located on the CpmGui-Server. The default directory where the file
may be located is “/”.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-81
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Start Transports
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Start Transports
When to use
Use this task to start supervision of an NML PM Transport.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Transport Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


An NML Transport must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to start supervision on an NML PM Transport.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML Transports” (p. 6-13) task.
Result: A list of NML Transports is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the Transport that you want to start.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Start Transport.


Note: The ID and User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on the Transport
that you selected.
Result: The Start Transport wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click the icon next to the Start filed.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click either the OK or Apply button to start supervision on the selected Transport.
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Start Transport wizard without
starting a Transport.
Result: Supervision of the selected Transport is started.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-82 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Stop Transports
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Stop Transports
When to use
Use this task to stop supervision of an NML PM Transport.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Transport Management” (p. 5-17)

Before you begin


An NML Transport must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to stop an NML PM Transport.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML Transports” (p. 6-13) task.
Result: A list of NML Transports is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight the Transport that you want to stop.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Stop Transport.


Note: The ID and User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on the Transport
that you selected.
Result: The Stop Transport wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click the icon next to the Stop filed.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click either the OK or Apply button to stop supervision on the selected Transport.
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Stop Transport wizard without
stopping a Transport.
Result: Supervision of the selected Transport is stopped.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-83
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Create TCAs
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create TCAs
When to use
Use this task to create an NML SDH PM Measure.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML TCA Management” (p. 5-18)

Before you begin


An NML PM Domain must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to create an NML/SDH PM TCA.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “Select NML Domains” (p. 6-11) task.
Result: A list of PM Domains on NML is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a PM Domain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Create TCA.


Result: The Create TCA Wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select an option from the drop-down list that appears next to each item below:
• TP Type for TCA
• Default TCA
• Granularity
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enter values in the following fields. Entry in some fields is optional.


• BBE Low
• BBE High
• ES Low

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-84 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Create TCAs
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• ES High
• FEBBE Low
• FEBBE High
• FEES Low
• FEES High
• FESES Low
• FESES High
• SES Low
• SES High
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click either the OK or Apply button to create a TCA.


Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Create TCA wizard without
creating a TCA.
Result: The TCA is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-85
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Delete TCAs
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete TCAs
When to use
Use this task to delete an NML PM TCA. This task deletes Performance Monitoring of
the TCA selected.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML TCA Management” (p. 5-18)

Before you begin


An NML PM Measure and a TCA must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to delete an NML PM TCA.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML TCAs” (p. 6-16) task.
Result: A list of NML TCAs is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a TCA.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Delete TCA.


Note: The ID and User Label fields are prepopulated with data based on the TCA that
you selected.
Result: The Delete TCA wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click either the OK or Apply button to delete the selected TCA.


Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Delete TCA wizard without
deleting a TP.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-86 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Delete TCAs
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Performance Monitoring of the TCA is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-87
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Generate an Audit for an NE
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generate an Audit for an NE


When to use
Use this task to generate an Audit for an NML NE.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Audit Management” (p. 5-18)

Before you begin


An NML NE must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to generate an Audit for an NML NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML NEs” (p. 6-17) task.
Result: A list of NML NEs is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight an NE for which you want to generate an Audit.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Generate Audit for NE.
Result: The Generate Audit for NE wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Audit Persistency is set to DB by default.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click either the OK or Apply button to generate an Audit for the selected NE.
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Generate Audit wizard without
generating an Audit of an NE.
Result: The Audit is generated for the selected NE.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-88 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Generate an Audit for a TP
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generate an Audit for a TP


When to use
Use this task to generate an Audit for an NML TP.

Related information
See the following topic in this document:
• “CPM NML” (p. 5-6)
• “NML Audit Management” (p. 5-18)

Before you begin


An NML TP must exist in the PM component.

Task
Complete the following steps to generate an Audit for an NML TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “List NML TPs” (p. 6-15) task.
Result: A list of NML TPs is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Highlight a TP for which you want to generate an Audit.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click on the highlighted item.


Result: A drop-down menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop-down menu, select Actions > Audit TP.


Result: The Generate Audit for TP wizard window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Audit Persistency is set to DB by default.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click either the OK or Apply button to generate an Audit for the selected TP.
Note: The Cancel button can be clicked to exit the Generate Audit wizard without
generating an Audit of a TP.
Result: The Audit is generated for the selected TP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS 6-89
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Performance Monitoring Tasks Generate an Audit for a TP
Termination Points, Transports and TCAs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-90 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Appendix A: Probable Cause
Mappings

Overview
CFM probable causes
The probable causes that are included in this appendix are those that are common to the
Correlated Fault Management (CFM) component. For probable causes that are specific to
another component of 1350 OMS, refer to that specific component documentation.

CFM OTO Alarm Probable Causes


General
All probable causes that can be correlated to CFM OMS Transport Objects (OTOs ) are
defined and generated in a common data file.
The following tables list the probable causes for these alarm types:
• Communication
• Quality Service
• Processing Errors
Table A-1 Probable Alarm Causes for CFM Communication OTOs

Communication Alarm Type


Alarm Probable Cause Probable Cause Value
Bandwidth Reduced BandwReduce 5029
Client Failure CLIENTfailure 5008
Connectivity Problem ConnProblem 5014
CP Communication Interface Alarm CPComminterfaceProb 5051
Data Communication Network Failure DCNFailure 5056
Degraded Protection DegProt 5028
Degraded Signal DegSig 5005
Equipment Failure EquipmentFail 5013

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS A-1
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Probable Cause Mappings CFM OTO Alarm Probable Causes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1 Probable Alarm Causes for CFM Communication OTOs (continued)

Communication Alarm Type


Alarm Probable Cause Probable Cause Value
Excessive BER ExBer 5004
Failed to Align Consistency Status failedToAlignConsSt 5033
GFP Protocol Error gfpProtocolError 5052
Incoming VLAN SNC Failure IncVlanSNCFail 5049
LCAS Exceeding Differential Delay LCASExDiffDel 5031
LCAS Protocol Error LCASProtError 5032
Media Failure MediaFailure 5001
Not Aligned Consistency Status notAlignedConsSt 5039
OSC Failure OSCFailure 5015
Outgoing VLAN SNC Failure OutVlanSNCFail 5050
Regenerator Failure Rsfailure 5003
Server Media Failure ServerMediaFailure 5027
SHDSL Problem sHDSLProblem 5017
Threshold Corrected Errors ThresholdCErr 5016
Transport Failure TRANSfailure 5007
Transport Incoming Failure IncomingFail 5019
Transport Outgoing Failure OutgoingFail 5018
Underlying Protection Degraded UnderProtDeg 5002
VLAN SNC Failure VlanSNCSfail 5048

Table A-2 Probable Alarm Causes for CFM Quality of Service OTOs

Quality of Service Alarm Type


Alarm Probable Cause Probable Cause Value
FEC Threshold Crossed 15m fECThresholdcrossed15m 5046
FEC Threshold Crossed 24h fECThresholdcrossed24h 5047
Quality Threshold Crossed 15m QualityTC15m 5009
Quality Threshold Crossed 24h QualityTC24h 5010

Table A-3 Probable Alarm Causes for CFM Processing Error OTOs

Processing Errors Alarm Type


Alarm Probable Cause Probable Cause Value
Configuration Mismatch CnfMismatch 5006
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-2 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Probable Cause Mappings CFM OTO Alarm Probable Causes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-3 Probable Alarm Causes for CFM Processing Error OTOs (continued)

Processing Errors Alarm Type


Alarm Probable Cause Probable Cause Value
MS Configuration Mismatch mSCnfMismatch 5011

CFM OTO Default ASAPs


General
The following table lists probable causes of the CFM OMS Transport Object (OTO)
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP), the default severity that has been assigned to
the alarm, and the related impact on the operational state of the system.
Important! When the operational state is disabled, the OTO is not functional.

Table A-4 CFM OTO ASAP Default Severity and Operational States

OTO Alarm Probable Cause Default Operational State


Severity Unchanged Disabled
Bandwidth Reduced Minor ✓
Client Failure Warning ✓
Configuration Mismatch Major ✓
Connectivity Problem Major ✓
CP Communication Interface Alarm Minor ✓
Data Communication Network Failure Warning ✓
Degraded Protection Warning ✓
Degraded Signal Warning ✓
Equipment Failure Major ✓
Excessive BER Major ✓
Failed to Align Consistency Status Warning ✓
GFP Protocol Error Major ✓
Incoming VLAN SNC Failure Minor ✓
LCAS Exceeding Differential Delay Major ✓
LCAS Protocol Error Major ✓
Media Failure Major ✓
MS Configuration Mismatch Major ✓
Not Aligned Consistency Status Warning ✓
OSC Failure Warning ✓
Outgoing VLAN SNC Failure Minor ✓

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS A-3
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Probable Cause Mappings CFM OTO Default ASAPs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-4 CFM OTO ASAP Default Severity and Operational States (continued)

OTO Alarm Probable Cause Default Operational State


Severity Unchanged Disabled
Regenerator Failure Major ✓
Remote Power Supply Failure Warning ✓
Server Media Failure Major ✓
SHDSL Problem Warning ✓
Threshold Corrected Errors Minor ✓
Transport Failure Major ✓
Transport Incoming Failure Major ✓
Transport Outgoing Failure Major ✓
Underlying Protection Degraded Warning ✓
VLAN SNC Failure Minor ✓
FEC Threshold Crossed 15m Minor ✓
FEC Threshold Crossed 24h Minor ✓
Quality Threshold Crossed 15m Minor ✓
Quality Threshold Crossed 24h Minor ✓

SDH OTO Alarm Probable Causes


General
All probable causes that can be correlated to SDH OMS Transport Objects (OTOs ) are
defined and generated in a common data file.
The following tables list the probable causes for these alarm types:
• Communication
• Quality of Service
Table A-5 Probable Alarm Causes for SDH Communication OTOs

Communication Alarm Type


Alarm Probable Cause Probable Cause Value
GMRE Auto Restoration Disabled gmreAutoRstDis 5054
GMRE Degraded gmreDegraded 5040
GMRE In Migration gmreInMigration
NP Degraded npDegraded 5043
NP Fault npFault 5044
SNC Active Unavailable sncActiveUnavailable 5053
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-4 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Probable Cause Mappings SDH OTO Alarm Probable Causes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-5 Probable Alarm Causes for SDH Communication OTOs (continued)

Communication Alarm Type


Alarm Probable Cause Probable Cause Value
SNC Auto Restoration Disabled sncAutoRstDis 5054
SNC Backup Unavailable sncBackupUnavailable 5037
SNC Failed Z ends sncFailedZEnd 5045
SNC Failure SNCfailure 5030
SNC Not Disjointed sncNotDisjointed 5042
SNC Read to Revert sncReadyToRevert 5035
SNC Rerouted sncRerouted 5034
SNC Reversion Blocked sncReversionBlocked 5036
SNC Sncp Degraded sncSncpDegraded 5038
Incoming Tandem Connection Failure TC_IncomingFlr 5021
Outgoing Tandem Connection Failure TC_OutgoingFlr 5022
Tandem Connection Failure TandemConFail 5020
TC Degraded Signal TC_DegSig 5023

Table A-6 Probable Alarm Causes for SDH Quality of Service OTOs

Quality of Service Alarm Type


Alarm Probable Cause Probable Cause Value
TC Threshold Crossed 15m TanConTCA15m 5024
TC Threshold Crossed 24h TanConTCA24h 5025

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS A-5
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Probable Cause Mappings SDH OTO Alarm Probable Causes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-6 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Appendix B: List of
Abbreviations

List of Abbreviations
List of Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
ACK Acknowledged
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALMAP Alcatel-Lucent MAnagement Platform
ANSI American National Standards Institute
API Application Programming Interface
ARS Action Remedy System
AS Alarm Surveillance
ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
BER Bit Error Rate
CA Correlated Alarm
CAL Current Alarm List
CAP Client Access Point
CD-ROM Compact Disc Read Only Memory
CFM Converged Fault Management; Correlation Fault Management; Common Fault
Management
CMP Comparison
CORBA Common Object Requesting Broker Architecture
CP Connectivity Problem
CPM Converged Performance Monitoring; Correlation Performance Monitoring;
Common Performance Monitoring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS B-1
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
List of Abbreviations List of Abbreviations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Abbreviation Meaning
CPMEML Converged Performance Monitoring Element Management Level
CPMGUISRV Converged Performance Monitoring Graphical User Interface Server
CPM INV Converged Performance Monitoring Inventory
CPMNML Converged Performance Monitoring Network Management Level
CSV Comma Separated Value
CT Craft Terminal
CTP Connection Termination Point
DB Database
DBMS Data Base Management System
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
EA Elementary Alarm
EML Element Management Layer
EMLIM Element Management Layer Interface Module
ET Elementary Topology
ETH Ethernet
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EXBER Excessive Bit Error Rate
FM Fault Management
GUI Graphical User Interface
HA High Availability
HAL Historical Alarm List
HO High Order
HP Hewlett Packard
HTML Hyper Text Markup Language
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer
ID Identification; identifier
IM Information Manager
IOO Generic OS-OS Interfaces (GENOS)
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
JFC Java File Chooser
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCSI Layered Client Server Infrastructure Interface
LO Low Order

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-2 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
List of Abbreviations List of Abbreviations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Abbreviation Meaning
LOP Loss of Pointer
LOS Loss Of Signal
Max Maximum
MIB Management Information Base
Min Minimum
MOC Method of Change
MOI Managed Object Identifier
MPLS Multi-Protocol Label Switching
MS Multiplex Section
MSOH Multiplexer Section Overhead (SDH)
MS SIGDEG Multiplex Section Signal Degrade
MS Spring Multiplex Section Shared Protection Ring
NA Network Adapter; Not Available, as in a measurement is NA.
NACK Not Acknowledged
NAP Network Access Point
NBI Northbound Interface
NE Network Element
NM Network Management; Not Monitored, as in a measurement is NM.
NML Network Management Layer
NMS Network Management System
NOC Network Operations Center
NPR Network Physical Resources
NRSV Not Reserved
NS Not Supported, as in a measurement is NS.
OCH Optical Channel
OI Open Interfaces
OMS Optical Management System, as in 1350 OMS
OMSN Optical Management System Network; Optical Multi-Services Node
OS Operation System
Param Parameter
PC Personal Computer
PDF Portable Document Format
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE Performance Entity

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS B-3
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
List of Abbreviations List of Abbreviations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Abbreviation Meaning
PKT Packet
PM Performance Monitoring
PMTP Performance Monitoring Termination Point
Q3 OSI interface based on CMISE
OMSN Optical Multi-Services Node
QOS Quality of Service
RSV Reserved
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEN-IM Simple Element Network Information Model
SM Service Management
SML Service Management Layer
SMS Short Message Service
SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SONET Synchronous Optical NETwork
SP Service Pack
SQL Structured Query Language
TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm (or Alert)
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TCT Tandem Connection Termination
TE Transport Entity
TMF Telemanagement Forum 814 Northbound Interface
TMN Telecommunications Management Network
T-MPLS Transport Multi-Protocol Label Switching
TP Termination Point or Terminal Point
TSD-IM Same as QB3 protocol. Information Model for interworking between Network
Managers and Network Elements.
TT Trouble Ticket
UDM User Data Manager
UPA Unavailable path alarm
URU Underlying Resource Unavailable
USM User Services Manager
VC Virtual Container

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-4 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
List of Abbreviations List of Abbreviations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Abbreviation Meaning
VPN Virtual Private Network
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
XML Extensible Markup Language
XSLT Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS B-5
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
List of Abbreviations List of Abbreviations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-6 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Index

A Access Alarm Sublists, 3-7 Alarm Activities Print Report Output, 3-43
Acknowledge Alarms, 3-36 General, 2-11 Alarm Severity Levels
Action Functions Alarm Debouncing, 2-12 Critical, 2-9
Performance Monitoring, 5-16 Management, 3-63 Indeterminate, 2-9
Administration Fault Windows Alarm Information Major, 2-9
Aging Configuration Window, from FM Window Access, 2-3 Minor, 2-9
2-40
Alarm List Areas Warning, 2-9
Aging List Tabbed Pane, 2-39
Hide, 3-14 Alarm Sources
Current Alarm List (CAL)
Show, 3-14 Administer, 3-45
Administration Tabbed Pane,
2-38 Alarm Lists Synchronize, 3-62
Export Management Window, Navigation for Correlated Alarm Sublists
2-46 Alarms, 2-5
Access, 3-7
Fault Management, 2-37 Alarm Management
Delete, 3-28
General Information, 2-37 Alarm Debouncing, 2-12
Inactive, 3-9
Print Management Window, Correlated Alarms on
Paginate, 3-10
2-46 Transports, 2-11
Alarms
Severity Change Configuration Current, 2-7
Window, 2-45 Acknowledge, 3-36
Description, 2-7
Severity Change List Tabbed Activate Sublist Counters, 3-26
Elementary, 2-8
Pane, 2-44 Administer Alarm Sources,
General Alarm Activities, 2-11
Trigger Configuration Window, 3-45
2-42 Global, 2-7
Automatically Raise an AS
Trigger List Tabbed Pane, 2-41 Historical, 2-8 Window, 3-12

Aging Configuration Window Indicators, 2-11 Clear, 2-8

Administration Fault Windows, Probable Causes, 2-10 Clear Manually, 3-39


2-40 Problem Types, 2-10 Correlated, 2-11
Aging List Tabbed Pane Severity Levels, 2-9 Correlated Indicators, 2-11
Administration Fault Windows, Status, 2-9 Create Sublist, 3-16
2-39
Alarm Reports Deactivate Sublist Counters,
3-27
Export Report Output, 3-41
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS IN-1
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Debouncing, Management, Archive Filter .............................................................
3-63
Current Alarm List (CAL) B Bandwidth Reduced alarm
default ASAPs for CFM OTOs, Administration Tabbed Pane, probable cause, A-1, A-3
A-3 2-39
Bar Chart Reports
Delete Alarm Sublists, 3-28 Archive Rules Setup
Performance Monitoring, 5-22
Display, 2-7 DBA, 6-67
Basic Filter Sub-Tabbed Pane
Export Report Output, 3-41 Archive Session Management
Sublist Properties Windows,
Freeze Data on Alarm List, 3-8 DBA, 6-69 2-35
Hide Alarm List Areas, 3-14 Archive Sessions .............................................................
Modify Sublist, 3-18 Automatically Archive, 6-71
C Clear an Alarm
Paginate Sublists, 3-10 Automatically Purge, 6-71
Manually, 3-39
Print Report Output, 3-43 DBA, 6-71
Client Failure alarm probable
probable causes of CFM AS Window cause, A-1, A-3
OTOs, A-1
Automatically Raise, 3-12 Configuration Mismatch alarm
probable causes of SDH OTOs, probable cause, A-2, A-3, A-3
Assign Alarms
A-4
Connectivity Problem alarm
and Reserve, 3-32
Purge Manually, 3-38 probable cause, A-1, A-3
Audience intended for this
Raise, 2-7 Consist Measures
document, xiii
Reserve, 3-31 for NML, 6-63
Audit for a TP
Reserve and Assign, 3-32 Performance Monitoring, 6-63
for NML, 6-89
Select Incoming Alarms Consistency Check
Generate, 6-89
Automatically, 3-11
on Measures, 6-63
Audit for an NE
Show Alarm List Areas, 3-14
Content Area
for NML, 6-88
Synchronize Alarm Sources,
Historical Fault Sublist, 2-25
3-62 Generate, 6-88
Content Contextual Menus
Trouble Ticket, 3-35 Audit Management
Historical Fault Sublist, 2-26
Unacknowledge, 3-37 Performance Monitoring, 5-18
on Current Fault Sublist, 2-17
Unreserve, 3-34 Auto Ack
Content Modifications
View Inactive Sublists, 3-9 Current Alarm List (CAL)
Administration Tabbed Pane, Historical Fault Sublist, 2-26
View More Information, 3-29
2-39
Contextual Menus
View Text Multi-Lines, 3-13
Auto Purge
Historical Fault Counter
Approach for Alarm Description
Current Alarm List (CAL) Summary, 2-25
Iterative, 2-3 Administration Tabbed Pane,
on Current Fault Counter
2-39
Architectural Overview Summary, 2-15
Auto TT
Fault Management, 2-5 Converged Performance
Current Alarm List (CAL) Monitoring, 5-2
Performance Monitoring, 5-4
Administration Tabbed Pane,
Correlate Report Profiles
Architecture of GUIs 2-39
with Measures, 6-37
Fault Management, 2-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Correlate Report Profiles with CPM EML Interfaces Current Fault Alarm
Measures
Performance Monitoring, 5-10 Menu, 2-22
Performance Monitoring, 6-37
CPM GUI Server Current Fault Alarm Sources
Correlated Alarm Indicators
Performance Monitoring, 5-4, Menu, 2-23
Correlated Elementary Alarms, 5-4
Current Fault Counter Summary
2-11
CPM GUI Server Interfaces Area
Customer, 2-11
Performance Monitoring, 5-9 of Current Fault GUI, 2-14
In Service/Not In Service, 2-11
CPM NML Current Fault Counter Summary
Primary/Secondary Condition, Contextual Menus
Performance Monitoring, 5-4,
2-11
5-6 of Current Fault GUI, 2-15
Time Stamps, 2-11
CPM NML Interfaces Current Fault Counter Summary
Correlated Alarms Modifications
Performance Monitoring, 5-9
on Transports, 2-11 of Current Fault GUI, 2-14
Create Measures
Correlated Elementary Alarms, Current Fault Counter Summary
for NML, 6-51
2-12 User Preferences
Performance Monitoring, 6-51
Correlation Rules of Current Fault GUI, 2-14
Create Report Profiles
Fault Management, 2-6 Current Fault Edit
for NML, 6-27
Counter Area Menu, 2-19
Performance Monitoring, 6-27
Historical Fault Sublist, 2-25 Current Fault File
Create TCAs
Counter Summary Area Menu, 2-19
for NML, 6-84
Historical Fault GUI, 2-25 Current Fault GUI, 2-13
for SDH, 6-84
Counter Summary Modifications Current Fault Alarm Menu,
Performance Monitoring, 6-84 2-22
Historical Fault GUI, 2-25
CSV File Current Fault Alarm Sources
Counters
Export EML and NML TPs, Menu, 2-23
Activate for Alarm Sublist,
6-80 Current Fault Counter Sublist
3-26
Export NML Measures, 6-64 Content Area, 2-16
Deactivate for Alarm Sublist,
Current Fault Counter Sublist
3-27 Current Alarm List (CAL)
Administration Tabbed Pane Content Area Fields, 2-16
CP Communication Interface
Current Fault Counter Sublist
Alarm alarm probable cause, Administration Fault Windows,
2-38 Content Contextual Menus,
A-1, A-3
2-17
CPM Archive Filter, 2-39
Current Fault Counter Sublist
Performance Monitoring, 5-2 Auto Ack, 2-39 Content Modifications, 2-17
CPM Architecture and Transaction Auto Purge, 2-39 Current Fault Counter Sublist
Behavior Counter Area, 2-15
Auto TT, 2-39
Performance Monitoring, 5-10 Current Alarm Management, 2-7 Current Fault Counter Sublist
CPM EML User Preferences, 2-17
Current Alarms
Current Fault Counter
Performance Monitoring, 5-4, Access, 3-3
5-8 Summary Area, 2-14

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS IN-3
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Current Fault Counter Current Fault View Retrieve, 6-69, 6-71
Summary Contextual Menus,
Menu, 2-19 DBA Automatically Archive or
2-15
Purge Archive Sessions
Current Fault Window
Current Fault Counter
EML, 6-71
Summary Modifications, 2-14 Menu, 2-23
Debouncing
Current Fault Counter Customer
Summary User Preferences, Alarms, 2-12
Alarms, 2-12
2-14 Degraded Protection alarm
.............................................................
Current Fault Edit Menu, 2-19 probable cause, A-1, A-3
D Data Communication Network
Current Fault File Menu, 2-19 Degraded Signal alarm probable
Failure alarm probable cause, cause, A-1, A-3
Current Fault Help Menu, 2-23 A-1, A-3
Delete Alarm Sublists, 3-28
Current Fault Sublist Menu, Database Administration
2-20 Delete Measures
in Performance Monitoring,
Current Fault View Menu, 2-19 5-23 for NML, 6-54
Current Fault Window Menu, PM EML, 5-23 Performance Monitoring, 6-54
2-23
PM NML, 5-23 Delete Report Profiles
Menus, 2-18
Database Table Views for NML, 6-35
Primary Window, 2-13
Fault Management, 2-6 Performance Monitoring, 6-35
Toolbar, 2-23 Delete TCAs
DBA
Current Fault Help
Archive Rules Setup, 6-67 for NML, 6-86
Menu, 2-23 Performance Monitoring, 6-86
Archive Session Management,
Current Fault Sublist 6-69 Display Tabbed Pane
Menu, 2-20 Automatically Archive or Sublist Properties Windows,
Current Fault Sublist Content Area Purge Archive Sessions, 6-71 2-34
of Current Fault GUI, 2-16 DBA Archive Rules .............................................................

Current Fault Sublist Content Area Archive, 6-67


E Elementary Alarm Management,
Fields Change, 6-67 2-8
of Current Fault GUI, 2-16 Purge, 6-67 EML Domains
Current Fault Sublist Content View, 6-67 Select in PM, 6-7
Contextual Menus
DBA Archive Rules Setup EML NEs
of Current Fault GUI, 2-17
EML, 6-67 List in PM, 6-8
Current Fault Sublist Content
DBA Archive Session Search by Name, 6-19
Modifications
Management
EML TPs
of Current Fault GUI, 2-17
EML, 6-69
Current Fault Sublist Counter Area List in PM, 6-9, 6-76
Viewing, 6-69
Search by Name and Type,
of Current Fault GUI, 2-15
DBA Archive Sessions 6-21
Current Fault Sublist User
Archive, 6-69 Search by Value, 6-23
Preferences
Delete, 6-69, 6-71 Equipment Failure alarm probable
of Current Fault GUI, 2-17
cause, A-1, A-3
Purge, 6-69

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-4 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Excessive BER alarm probable Correlation Rules, 2-6 Filter List Panel
cause, A-2, A-3
Database Table Views, 2-6 Secondary Fault Windows,
Export an Alarm Report, 3-41 2-30
Description, 2-1
Export Management Window Filter Tabbed Pane
External Interfaces and Data,
Administration Fault Windows, 2-5 Sublist Properties Windows,
2-46 2-34
Fault Management Description,
Export Measures to a CSV File 2-1 FM
See: Fault Management
NML, 6-64 Fault Management
Functionalities, 2-2 Fault Management, 3-3, 3-4
Export TPs to a CSV File
Features, 2-2 Freeze Alarm Data
EML, 6-80
Functionalities, 2-2 on an Alarm List, 3-8
NML, 6-80
Internal Interfaces and Data, ............................................................
Extended Filter Sub-Tabbed Pane
2-5
Sublist Properties Windows, G Generate an Audit for a TP
Iterative Approach for Alarm
2-35 Performance Monitoring, 6-89
Description, 2-3
External Interfaces and Data Generate an Audit for an NE
Overview, 2-1
Fault Management, 2-5 Performance Monitoring, 6-88
Secondary Fault Windows,
............................................................. 2-29 Generate PM Reports
F Failed to Align Consistency Status Supported External Products, Bar Chart, 6-45
alarm probable cause, A-2, A-3 2-5
Line Chart, 6-45
Fault Alarm Menu Workflow Navigation, 2-4
Tabular, 6-45
Historical Fault GUI, 2-27 Fault Management from Another
GFP Protocol Error alarm
Application
Fault Archive Menu probable cause, A-2, A-3
Navigate to, 3-5
Historical Fault GUI, 2-28 Global Alarm Management, 2-7
Fault Management to Another
Fault Edit Menu Application GMRE Auto Restoration Disabled
alarm probable cause, A-4
Historical Fault GUI, 2-27 Navigate from, 3-6
GMRE Degraded alarm probable
Fault File Menu
Fault Sublist Menu cause, A-4
Historical Fault GUI, 2-27
Historical Fault GUI, 2-27 GMRE In Migration alarm
Fault Help Menu Fault View Menu probable cause, A-4
Historical Fault GUI, 2-28 Historical Fault GUI, 2-27 Granularity, see Performance
Fault Management Monitoring, 5-2
Fault Window Menu
GUI
Access for Current Alarms, 3-3
Historical Fault GUI, 2-28
Access for Historical Alarms, Current Fault, 2-13
FEC Threshold Crossed 15m alarm
3-4 Historical Fault, 2-24
probable cause, A-2, A-4
Administration Fault Windows, FEC Threshold Crossed 24h alarm Historical Fault Primary
2-37 Window, 2-24
probable cause, A-2, A-4
Alarm Management, 2-7 Filter Configuration GUI Toolbar
Architectural Overview, 2-5 Secondary Fault Windows, Historical Fault, 2-28
Architecture of GUIs, 2-3 2-31

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS IN-5
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. Inactive Alarm Sublists Media Failure alarm probable
cause, A-2, A-3
H Historical Alarm Management View, 3-9
Menus
Create Sublists, 2-8 Incoming Alarms
Current Fault GUI, 2-18
Extract Alarms, 2-8 Automatically Raise an AS
Window, 3-12 Historical Fault GUI, 2-26
View Alarm Sublists, 2-8
Automatically Select, 3-11 Modify Measures
View Detailed Alarm
Information, 2-8 Incoming Tandem Connection for NML, 6-53
Failure alarm probable cause,
Historical Alarms Performance Monitoring, 6-53
A-5
Access, 3-4 Modify Report Profiles
Incoming VLAN SNC Failure
Historical Fault GUI, 2-24 alarm probable cause, A-2, A-3 for NML, 6-32

Counter Summary Area, 2-25 Internal Interfaces and Data Performance Monitoring, 6-32

Counter Summary Contextual Fault Management, 2-5 More Alarm Information


Menus, 2-25 ............................................................. Secondary Fault Windows,
Counter Summary 2-29
L LCAS Exceeding Differential
Modifications, 2-25 More Info Menu Option
Delay alarm probable cause, A-2,
Counter Summary User A-3 View for Alarms, 3-29
Preferences, 2-25
LCAS Protocol Error alarm MS Configuration Mismatch alarm
Fault Alarm Menu, 2-27 probable cause, A-2, A-3 probable cause, A-3
Fault Archive Menu, 2-28 Line Chart Reports .............................................................
Fault Edit Menu, 2-27 Performance Monitoring, 5-21 N Navigation
Fault File Menu, 2-27 .............................................................
from Alarm Lists for
Fault Help Menu, 2-28 M Measure Management Correlated Alarms, 2-5
Fault Sublist Menu, 2-27 Performance Monitoring, 5-17 from Fault Management from
Another Application, 3-6
Fault View Menu, 2-27 Measures
to Fault Management from
Fault Window Menu, 2-28 Consist, 6-63 Another Application, 3-5
Menus, 2-26 Consistency Check, 6-63 NE Name
Primary Window, 2-24 Create, 6-51 Search for in EML, 6-19
Sublist Content Area, 2-25 Delete, 6-54 NML
Sublist Content Contextual Modify, 6-53 Audit Management, 5-18
Menus, 2-26
Start, 6-55 Measure Management, 5-17
Sublist Content Modifications,
2-26 Stop, 6-57 Report Profile Management,
Unassociate from Transport, 5-19
Sublist Counter Area, 2-25
6-78 TCA Management, 5-18
Sublist User Preferences, 2-26
Measures in PM TP Management, 5-18
Toolbar, 2-28
Correlate Report Profiles with, Transport Management, 5-17
.............................................................
6-37
NML Domains
I In Service/Not In Service Uncorrelate Report Profiles
with, 6-40 Select in PM, 6-11
Alarms, 2-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-6 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NML Measures Audit Management, 5-18 Generate Tabular, Line Chart,
or Bar Chart Reports, 6-45
List in PM, 6-6, 6-12 Automatically Archive or
Purge Archive Sessions, 6-71 Granularity, 5-2
NML NEs
Bar Chart Reports, 5-22 Line Chart Reports, 5-21
List in PM, 6-17
Collection Timeframe Features, List EML NEs, 6-8
NML Report Profiles
5-2
List EML TPs, 6-9, 6-76
List in PM, 6-26
Consist Measures, 6-63
List NML Measures, 6-6, 6-12
NML TCAs
Converged, 5-2
List NML NEs, 6-17
List in PM, 6-16
Correlate Report Profiles with
List NML Report Profiles,
NML TPs Measures, 6-37
6-26
List in PM, 6-15 CPM Architecture and
List NML TCAs, 6-16
NML Transports Transaction Behavior, 5-10
List NML TPs, 6-15
CPM EML, 5-4, 5-8
List in PM, 6-13
List NML Transports, 6-13
CPM EML Interfaces, 5-10
NML Unassociated Transports
List NML Unassociated
CPM GUI Server, 5-4, 5-4
List in PM, 6-14 Transports, 6-14
Not Aligned Consistency Status CPM GUI Server Interfaces,
Measure Management, 5-17
5-9
alarm probable cause, A-2, A-3
Modify Measures, 6-53
CPM NML, 5-4, 5-6
NP Degraded alarm probable
Modify Report Profiles, 6-32
cause, A-4 CPM NML Interfaces, 5-9
Overview, 5-2
NP Fault alarm probable cause, Create Measures, 6-51
A-4 Report Analysis, 5-14
Create Report Profiles, 6-27
............................................................. Report Generation Concepts,
Create TCAs, 6-84
5-19
O OSC Failure alarm probable cause,
Database Administration, 5-23
A-2, A-3 Report Profile Management,
DBA Archive Rules Setup, 5-19
Outgoing Tandem Connection 6-67
Failure alarm probable cause, Search EML NEs by Name,
A-5 DBA Archive Session 6-19
Management, 6-69
Outgoing VLAN SNC Failure Search EML TPs by Name
alarm probable cause, A-2, A-3 Delete Measures, 6-54 and Type, 6-21

............................................................. Delete Report Profiles, 6-35 Search EML TPs by Value,


6-23
Delete TCAs, 6-86
P Paginate Sublists
Search Functions, 5-15
Export EML and NML TPs to a
Alarms, 3-10
CSV File, 6-80 Select EML Domains, 6-7
Performance Monitoring
Export NML Measures to a Select NML Domains, 6-11
Access, 5-3, 6-4 CSV File, 6-64
Select Report Profiles, 6-30
Action Functions, 5-16 Functionalities, 5-2
Set Report Criteria, 6-47
Architectural Overview, 5-4 Generate an Audit for a TP,
Set Time for a Generated
Archive Rule Edit Wizard, 6-89
Report, 6-43
5-23 Generate an Audit for an NE,
Start Measures, 6-55
6-88
Archive Session Management
Start TPs, 6-72
Wizard, 5-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS IN-7
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Start Transports, 6-82 Quality Threshold Crossed 24h Filter Configuration, 2-31
alarm probable cause, A-2, A-4
Stop Measures, 6-57 Filter List Panel, 2-30
.............................................................
Stop TPs, 6-74 More Alarm Information, 2-29
Stop Transports, 6-83 R Regenerator Failure alarm Sublist Properties, 2-33
probable cause, A-2, A-4
Tabular Reports, 5-20 Select Report Profiles
Remote Power Supply Failure
TCA Management, 5-18 alarm probable cause, A-4 for NML, 6-30
Termination Point (TP) Values, Report Analysis Performance Monitoring, 6-30
5-16
Performance Monitoring, 5-14 Server Media Failure alarm
TP Management, 5-18 probable cause, A-2, A-4
Report Criteria
Transport Management, 5-17 Set Report Criteria
Performance Monitoring, 6-47
Unassociate Transport from Performance Monitoring, 6-47
Measures, 6-78 Report Output
Set Time for a Generated Report
Uncorrelate Report Profiles Alarms, 3-41
EML, 6-43
with Measures, 6-40 Report Profile Management
NML, 6-43
View the Properties of a Performance Monitoring, 5-19
Selected List Item, 6-18 Severity Change Configuration
Report Profiles Window
PM
Correlate with Measures, 6-37 Administration Fault Windows,
Performance Monitoring, 6-4
Create, 6-27 2-45
Primary/Secondary Condition
Delete, 6-35 Severity Change List Tabbed Pane
Alarms, 2-12
Modify, 6-32 Administration Fault Windows,
Print an Alarm Report, 3-43 2-44
Select, 6-30
Print Management Window Severity Levels
Uncorrelate with Measures,
Administration Fault Windows, 6-40 of Alarms, 2-9
2-46
Reporting Generation SHDSL Problem alarm probable
Probable cause mappings for CFM cause, A-2, A-4
alarms, A-1 Concepts for PM, 5-19
SNC Active Unavailable alarm
Probable Causes Reserve Alarms, 3-31 probable cause, A-4
of Alarms, 2-10 and Assign, 3-32 SNC Auto Restoration Disabled
Resource Identification alarm probable cause, A-5
Problem Types
from FM Window Access, 2-3 SNC Backup Unavailable alarm
of Alarms, 2-10
probable cause, A-5
.............................................................
Properties
SNC Failed Z ends alarm probable
View the Properties of a S Safety information, xiii cause, A-5
Selected PM List Item, 6-18 SDH SNC Failure alarm probable cause,
Purge an Alarm A-5
TCA Management, 5-18
Manually, 3-38 Search Functions SNC Not Disjointed alarm
............................................................. probable cause, A-5
Performance Monitoring, 5-15
SNC Read to Revert alarm
Q Quality Threshold Crossed 15m Secondary Fault Windows probable cause, A-5
alarm probable cause, A-2, A-4
Fault Management, 2-29

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-8 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNC Rerouted alarm probable Sublist Content Modifications Termination Point (TP)
cause, A-5 Management
on Current Fault Sublist, 2-17
SNC Reversion Blocked alarm Performance Monitoring, 5-18
Sublist Counter Area
probable cause, A-5
Termination Point (TP) Values,
on Current Fault Counter
SNC Sncp Degraded alarm 5-16
Sublist, 2-15
probable cause, A-5
Text Multi-Lines
Sublist Counters
Sort Tabbed Pane
View for Alarms, 3-13
Activate for Alarms, 3-26
Sublist Properties Windows,
Threshold Corrected Errors alarm
2-35 Deactivate for Alarms, 3-27
probable cause, A-2, A-4
Start Measures Sublist Properties
Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA)
for NML, 6-55 Secondary Fault Windows, Management
2-33
Performance Monitoring, 6-55 Performance Monitoring, 5-18
Sublist Properties Windows
Start TPs Time Stamps
Basic Filter Sub-Tabbed Pane,
for NML, 6-72 Alarms, 2-12
2-35
Performance Monitoring, 6-72 Toolbar
Display Tabbed Pane, 2-34
Start Transports Current Fault GUI, 2-23
Extended Filter Sub-Tabbed
for NML, 6-82 Pane, 2-35 Topology
Performance Monitoring, 6-82 Filter Tabbed Pane, 2-34 of Current Fault GUI, 2-13
Status Sort Tabbed Pane, 2-35 TP Name
of Alarms, 2-9 Trigger Tabbed Pane, 2-36 Search for in EML, 6-21
Stop Measures Supported External Products TP Type
for NML, 6-57 Fault Management, 2-5 Search for in EML, 6-21
Performance Monitoring, 6-57 Synchronize TP Value
Stop TPs Alarm Sources, 3-62 Search for in EML, 6-23
for NML, 6-74 ............................................................. TP Values
Performance Monitoring, 6-74 T Tabular Reports Concepts, 5-16
Stop Transports Performance Monitoring, 5-20 TPs
for NML, 6-83 Tandem Connection Failure alarm Start, 6-72
Performance Monitoring, 6-83 probable cause, A-5 Stop, 6-74
Sublist TC Degraded Signal alarm Transport Failure alarm probable
probable cause, A-5 cause, A-2, A-4
Create for Alarms, 3-16
TC Threshold Crossed 15m alarm Transport Incoming Failure alarm
Modify for Alarms, 3-18 probable cause, A-5 probable cause, A-2, A-4
Sublist Content Area TC Threshold Crossed 24h alarm Transport Management
on Current Fault Counter probable cause, A-5
Performance Monitoring, 5-17
Sublist, 2-16 TCAs
Transport Outgoing Failure alarm
Sublist Content Area Fields Create, 6-84 probable cause, A-2, A-4
on Current Fault Sublist, 2-16 Delete, 6-86 Transports
Start, 6-82
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1350 OMS IN-9
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stop, 6-83 .............................................................

Unassociate from Measures, V View Inactive Alarm Sublists, 3-9


6-78
View Text Multi-Lines
Trigger Configuration Window
for Alarms, 3-13
Administration Fault Windows,
2-42 VLAN SNC Failure alarm
probable cause, A-2, A-4
Trigger List Tabbed Pane
.............................................................
Administration Fault Windows,
2-41 W Workflow Navigation

Trigger Tabbed Pane Fault Management, 2-4

Sublist Properties Windows,


2-36
Trouble Ticket Alarms, 3-35
Enter for specific alarm, 3-35
Type Identification
Fault Management, 2-3
.............................................................

U Unacknowledge Alarms, 3-37

Unassociate Measures from


Transport
for NML, 6-78
Unassociate Transport from
Measures
Performance Monitoring, 6-78
Uncorrelate Report Profiles
with Measures, 6-40
Uncorrelate Report Profiles with
Measures
Performance Monitoring, 6-40
Underlying Protection Degraded
alarm probable cause, A-2, A-4
Unreserve Alarms, 3-34
User Preferences
Historical Fault Counter
Summary, 2-25
Historical Fault Sublist, 2-26
on Current Fault Counter
Summary, 2-14
on Current Fault Sublist, 2-17

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-10 1350 OMS
8DG42227FAAA 9.6
Issue 3 June 2014

Anda mungkin juga menyukai